- All categories
Welcome to Wikbeauty
Main menu
-
SHOP All
-
Shop by Category
- Shop by Category
-
Body Contouring & Fat Reduction
-
Facial & Skin Rejuvenation
-
Recovery & Circulation Therapy
-
Bestsellers
Your cart
Product Comparison
Describe you product comparison grid
|
__ __ |
|
|---|---|
| Vendor |
Vendor - __ |
| SKU |
SKU - __ |
| Description |
Description - __ |
| Customizable title |
Customizable title - __ |
| Variant name |
Variant name - __ |
|
|
Compare products ( / )
Products
Products
Transform Every Treatment
From fat reduction to facial rejuvenation, our professional-grade equipment is built to elevate every service on your menu, giving clients real results and your business a competitive edge.
81 products
81 products
Sort by:
- Featured
- Most relevant
- Best selling
- Alphabetically, A-Z
- Alphabetically, Z-A
- Price, low to high
- Price, high to low
- Date, old to new
- Date, new to old
$3,599.00
Professional Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy System
Electromagnetic and Pneumatic Shockwave Technology for Multi-Application Treatments
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C is a professional extracorporeal shockwave therapy system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic technologies on one integrated platform.
Its electromagnetic handpiece provides focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas, while the pneumatic handpiece generates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue applications. Practitioners can select the appropriate technology according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
The system includes 19 treatment tips, three dedicated treatment interfaces, a 10.4-inch color touchscreen, adjustable energy and frequency settings, a built-in cooling system, and an impact counter.
Two shockwave technologies | 19 treatment tips | Three dedicated modes | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Shockwave Technologies on One Platform Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
The electromagnetic handpiece uses a precision magnetic-coil mechanism to generate focused acoustic energy. Its concentrated delivery is designed for smaller treatment zones and applications that require precise energy placement. Common applications include: Focused musculoskeletal treatments Tendon and soft-tissue programs Localized pain-management support Sports-injury rehabilitation Erectile-function treatment protocols Targeted physiotherapy applications Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate an internal projectile. The resulting impact creates radial pressure waves that disperse through a broader tissue area. Common applications include: Large soft-tissue areas Cellulite treatments Body-contouring programs Broad physiotherapy applications Muscle and connective-tissue treatments Sports-recovery programs Integrated Dual-Technology Operation
The two handpieces allow practitioners to select focused electromagnetic energy or broader pneumatic pressure waves without purchasing separate systems. This integrated configuration supports: Precise and broad treatment options Multiple professional applications Customizable treatment protocols Efficient switching between services Reduced equipment requirements Flexible clinical workflows Select the Right Treatment Mode for Each Client Erectile-Function Treatment Mode
The dedicated ED interface includes five mapped treatment zones, impact counting, round tracking, preload selection, and electromagnetic or pneumatic mode options. Recommended applications: Professional erectile-function protocols Vascular-support treatment programs Targeted acoustic-wave applications Structured multi-session treatments Recommended for: Appropriately screened adult male clients Specialist men’s wellness clinics Qualified practitioners offering ED protocols This application should only be provided within the practitioner’s permitted professional scope and according to applicable local requirements. Anti-Cellulite Treatment Mode
The anti-cellulite interface provides body-area mapping and adjustable settings for different treatment zones. Recommended applications: Cellulite appearance treatments Localized body-contouring programs Skin-texture improvement Soft-tissue stimulation Body wellness treatments Recommended for: Clients concerned about visible cellulite Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clinics offering structured body-care programs Physiotherapy Treatment Mode
The physiotherapy interface covers nine musculoskeletal regions and supports customizable frequency, energy, and impact settings. Recommended applications: Tendon and soft-tissue treatments Sports-injury recovery programs Chronic musculoskeletal conditions Rehabilitation support Localized pain-management programs Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Sports and recovery clients Clients with professionally assessed musculoskeletal concerns Sports-Recovery Program
Practitioners can select the appropriate electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the size, depth, and location of the target area. Recommended applications: Tendon overuse conditions Muscle and soft-tissue recovery Shoulder, elbow, knee, and ankle programs Post-activity recovery support Recommended for: Athletes Active adults Fitness and rehabilitation clients Electromagnetic Energy and Frequency Control The electromagnetic handpiece offers adjustable focused-shockwave parameters for precise treatments. Settings should be selected according to the treatment area, professional protocol, and client response. Pneumatic Pressure and Frequency Control
The pneumatic handpiece provides adjustable radial pressure-wave settings for broader treatment areas. Nineteen Interchangeable Treatment Tips
The Dual Wave C includes seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads to support different treatment depths, areas, and professional applications. The exact tip should be selected according to its intended function, the treatment area, and the supplied professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
The available heads and treatment settings support multiple upper-body physiotherapy and recovery applications. Common treatment areas include: Shoulder Elbow Hand and wrist Upper back Selected arm muscles and tendons Lower-Body Areas
Focused or radial shockwave delivery can be selected according to the size and location of the lower-body treatment area. Common treatment areas include: Hip Knee Thigh Achilles tendon Foot and ankle Plantar area Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Dedicated interfaces and specialized treatment heads support professionally assessed body and intimate wellness applications. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist Buttocks Inner and outer thighs Legs Suitable ED treatment zones Professional Treatment Applications Common Musculoskeletal Applications The Dual Wave C may be incorporated into professional protocols for suitable clients with: Tennis elbow Tendinitis and tendinopathy Plantar fasciitis Frozen shoulder Achilles tendon concerns Shoulder impingement Rotator-cuff concerns Suitable wrist and hand conditions Knee and ankle concerns Lumbar and hip discomfort Chronic musculoskeletal concerns Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation Treatment suitability, diagnosis, parameters, and expected outcomes must be determined by an appropriately qualified professional. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, current symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment goals, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Treatment Mode Selection
Select the appropriate ED, anti-cellulite, or physiotherapy interface. Choose the electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the application. Step 3: Tip and Parameter Selection
Install the appropriate treatment head and select the required energy or pressure, frequency, preload, and number of impacts. Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client response. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the treatment medium, inspect the area, document the settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Dual Wave C combines two shockwave technologies, specialized interfaces, and extensive treatment-head options in one clinical platform. Key advantages include: Electromagnetic and pneumatic technologies Two independent professional handpieces Seven electromagnetic treatment heads Twelve pneumatic treatment heads Nineteen treatment tips in total Three dedicated treatment interfaces Adjustable electromagnetic energy and frequency Adjustable pneumatic pressure and frequency Six preload settings 10.4-inch color touchscreen Treatment-area mapping Integrated impact counter Built-in handpiece cooling Rear-mounted storage tank 500W power consumption 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Professional training and lifetime support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Dual Wave C main unit 1 × Electromagnetic shockwave handpiece 1 × Pneumatic ballistic shockwave handpiece 7 × Electromagnetic treatment heads 12 × Pneumatic treatment heads 19 × Total treatment tips 1 × Integrated 10.4-inch touchscreen Built-in handpiece cooling system Rear-mounted storage tank Impact-counting system Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Dual-technology operation training Electromagnetic parameter guidance Pneumatic parameter guidance Treatment-head selection guidance ED protocol training Anti-cellulite protocol training Physiotherapy protocol training Client-screening documentation Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Dual Wave C system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both technologies safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and interface operation Client consultation and screening Electromagnetic handpiece operation Pneumatic handpiece operation Treatment-head selection Energy, pressure, and frequency adjustment Preload and impact-count settings ED treatment interface Anti-cellulite treatment interface Physiotherapy treatment interface Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Treatment heads, projectiles, sealing components, and other parts subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The Dual Wave C should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active thrombosis or blood clots Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Severely impaired sensation Active growth plates in children Recent surgery within the treatment area Metal implants requiring medical clearance Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision Additional considerations for ED treatments include: Active infection or inflammation Penile implants or prostheses Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment Client eligibility, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements. Operating Precautions Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and heads before treatment. Select the correct handpiece and treatment head. Begin with conservative settings. Increase energy or pressure progressively according to response. Use appropriate coupling medium where required. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment settings and impact counts. Clean and disinfect reusable components after treatment. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine facilities Musculoskeletal treatment practices Men’s wellness clinics Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Integrated wellness centers Qualified medical and allied-health practices Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering shockwave treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Dual Wave C?
Two Shockwave Technologies
The system combines focused electromagnetic energy and radial pneumatic pressure waves, supporting precise and broad-area applications on one platform. Nineteen Treatment Tips
Seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads provide extensive treatment flexibility for different anatomical areas and professional protocols. Three Dedicated Interfaces
Separate ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy modes streamline parameter selection, body-area mapping, impact counting, and treatment documentation. Customizable Professional Settings
Adjustable energy, pressure, frequency, preload, and impact settings allow professionals to personalize each session. Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Dual Wave C?
The Dual Wave C is a professional ESWT system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one platform. What is the difference between the two handpieces?
The electromagnetic handpiece generates focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas. The pneumatic handpiece creates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue areas. How many treatment tips are included?
The system includes 19 tips: seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads. Which treatment modes are available?
The touchscreen provides three dedicated interfaces for ED treatments, anti-cellulite programs, and physiotherapy applications. What settings are available for the electromagnetic handpiece?
The electromagnetic handpiece provides an energy range of 5–200mJ and a frequency range of 1–16Hz. What settings are available for the pneumatic handpiece?
The pneumatic handpiece provides a pressure range of 1–6 Bar and a frequency range of 1–21Hz. Which areas can be treated?
Supported areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, lumbar area, hip, knee, foot, ankle, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, legs, and suitable intimate wellness treatment zones. Can the machine support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. It includes a dedicated ED interface and two specialized electromagnetic heads. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements. Can it be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. The pneumatic handpiece and dedicated anti-cellulite interface support body-mapped cellulite and skin-texture programs. Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies by treatment area, condition, energy level, and individual sensitivity. Intensity can be adjusted during treatment to maintain appropriate tolerance. How many sessions are recommended?
The number and frequency of sessions depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and selected protocol. Treatment plans should be personalized rather than guaranteed. Can both handpieces operate simultaneously?
The supplied configuration includes two independent handpieces and supports dual-handpiece operation. Actual use should follow the operating manual and selected professional protocol. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers both shockwave technologies, the three treatment interfaces, treatment-head selection, parameter adjustment, client screening, safety, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C enables qualified clinics and wellness facilities to provide electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave treatments using one professional platform. Five key benefits: Electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave technologies Nineteen treatment tips for precise and broad applications Dedicated ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy interfaces Adjustable energy, pressure, frequency, and impact settings CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Energy
5–200mJ
Adjustable focused acoustic output
Frequency
1–16Hz
Customizable pulse-delivery speed
Treatment Heads
Seven
Different focused applications
ED-Specific Heads
Two
Dedicated professional protocols
Preload Settings
Six
Customizable treatment response
Monitoring
Handpiece-mounted display
Real-time setting observation
Cooling
Built-in cooling fan
Supports continued operation
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Pressure
1–6 Bar
Adjustable radial-wave intensity
Frequency
1–21Hz
Customizable impact speed
Treatment Heads
Twelve
Broad treatment versatility
Head Types
Focus, radial, and flat
Different pressure-wave distributions
Head Diameters
6–25mm
Small and large treatment zones
Tip Changing
Easy-change mechanism
Efficient treatment preparation
Mechanism
Compressed-air ballistic
Radial pressure-wave generation
Tip Group
Quantity
Primary Applications
Electromagnetic Heads
Seven
Precise and focused treatment zones
ED-Specific Heads
Two of the seven electromagnetic heads
Professional erectile-function protocols
Pneumatic Focus Heads
Included within the twelve pneumatic heads
Concentrated radial treatment
Pneumatic Radial Heads
Included within the twelve pneumatic heads
General soft-tissue treatment
Pneumatic Flat Heads
Included within the twelve pneumatic heads
Broader surface coverage
Total Treatment Tips
Nineteen
Multi-application clinical coverage
Treatment Category
Common Applications
Recommended Technology
Erectile-Function Programs
Professionally assessed vascular-support protocols
Electromagnetic or protocol-selected mode
Cellulite Treatments
Body texture and cellulite appearance
Pneumatic radial
Physiotherapy
Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue conditions
Electromagnetic or pneumatic
Sports Recovery
Muscle, tendon, and activity-related recovery
Protocol-dependent
Musculoskeletal Rehabilitation
Functional recovery and localized pain support
Focused or radial shockwave
Body Contouring
Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs
Pneumatic radial
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Dual Wave C
Model
ESWT-DOUBLE-C
Technology
Electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave
Input Voltage
AC 110V or 220V
Power Consumption
500W
Display
10.4-inch color touchscreen
Treatment Handpieces
Two: electromagnetic and pneumatic
Treatment Modes
ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy
Electromagnetic Frequency
1–16Hz
Electromagnetic Energy
5–200mJ
Electromagnetic Heads
Seven, including two ED-specific heads
Pneumatic Frequency
1–21Hz
Pneumatic Pressure
1–6 Bar
Pneumatic Heads
Twelve
Pneumatic Head Types
Focus, radial, and flat
Pneumatic Head Diameters
6–25mm
Total Treatment Tips
Nineteen
Preload Settings
Six
Special Features
Cooling system, storage tank, and impact counter
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$2,900.00
Professional Compact Dual-Technology Shockwave System
Electromagnetic and Pneumatic Shockwave Therapy in a Portable Flight-Case Design
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini is a professional extracorporeal shockwave therapy system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one compact platform.
The electromagnetic handpiece delivers focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas, while the pneumatic handpiece produces radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue and body applications. Practitioners can select the appropriate modality according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
With two treatment handpieces, 18 interchangeable treatment tips, three dedicated interfaces, a 10.4-inch touchscreen, and a compact flight-case design, the Dual Wave Mini is suitable for clinics that require multi-application performance without a large equipment footprint.
Two shockwave technologies | 18 treatment tips | Three dedicated modes | Compact flight case | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Shockwave Technologies on One Platform Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
The electromagnetic handpiece uses a precision magnetic-coil mechanism to generate focused acoustic energy. Its concentrated delivery supports treatments requiring accurate energy placement within a selected area. Common applications include: Focused musculoskeletal treatments Tendon and soft-tissue programs Sports-injury rehabilitation Localized physiotherapy applications Erectile-function treatment protocols Targeted recovery programs Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate an internal projectile. The projectile strikes the selected treatment tip, creating radial pressure waves that disperse across a broader tissue area. Common applications include: Cellulite treatments Body-contouring programs Broad soft-tissue areas Physiotherapy treatments Sports-recovery programs Musculoskeletal rehabilitation Integrated Dual-Technology Operation
The two handpieces can be selected directly from the system, allowing practitioners to switch between electromagnetic and pneumatic treatments according to the application. This integrated configuration supports: Focused and radial treatment options Multiple professional applications Customizable treatment protocols Efficient service transitions Reduced equipment requirements Flexible clinical workflows Select the Right Treatment Mode for Each Client Erectile-Function Treatment Mode
The dedicated ED interface includes five mapped treatment zones, impact counting, preload selection, and switching between electromagnetic and pneumatic delivery. Recommended applications: Professional erectile-function protocols Vascular-support treatment programs Targeted acoustic-wave applications Structured multi-session treatments Recommended for: Appropriately screened adult male clients Men’s wellness clinics Qualified professionals offering ED protocols This application should only be provided within the practitioner’s permitted professional scope and according to applicable local requirements. Anti-Cellulite Treatment Mode
The anti-cellulite interface provides body-area mapping and customizable parameters for different treatment zones. Recommended applications: Cellulite appearance treatments Body-texture improvement Localized body-contouring programs Soft-tissue stimulation Skin-firming support Recommended for: Clients concerned about visible cellulite Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clinics offering structured body-care programs Physiotherapy Treatment Mode
The physiotherapy interface supports treatment planning for key musculoskeletal regions and provides adjustable shockwave parameters. Recommended applications: Tendon and soft-tissue treatments Shoulder, elbow, wrist, and hand programs Hip, knee, foot, and ankle treatments Musculoskeletal rehabilitation Localized pain-management support Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Rehabilitation clients Clients with professionally assessed musculoskeletal concerns Sports-Recovery Program
Practitioners can select focused electromagnetic energy or radial pneumatic pressure waves according to the location, depth, and size of the treatment area. Recommended applications: Tendon overuse conditions Muscle and soft-tissue recovery Post-injury rehabilitation Shoulder, knee, and ankle programs Recommended for: Athletes Active adults Fitness and rehabilitation clients Sports-recovery facilities Electromagnetic Energy and Frequency Control
The electromagnetic handpiece provides adjustable focused-shockwave settings for precise professional applications. Settings should be selected according to professional assessment, treatment objectives, client response, and the supplied protocols. Pneumatic Pressure and Frequency Control
The pneumatic handpiece provides adjustable radial shockwave settings for broad and targeted treatment areas. Eighteen Interchangeable Treatment Tips
The Dual Wave Mini includes seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads to support different treatment areas and The correct treatment tip should be selected according to its intended function, treatment location, client condition, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
The available electromagnetic and pneumatic heads support multiple upper-body physiotherapy and recovery programs. Common treatment areas include: Shoulder Elbow Hand and wrist Upper back Suitable arm muscles and tendons Lower-Body Areas
The handpiece, treatment tip, and parameters can be selected according to the size and location of the target area. Common treatment areas include: Hip Knee Thigh Achilles tendon Foot and ankle Plantar area Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Dedicated interfaces and specialized treatment heads support professionally administered body and intimate wellness programs. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist Buttocks Inner and outer thighs Legs Suitable ED treatment zones Professional Treatment Applications Common Musculoskeletal Applications
The Dual Wave Mini may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with: Tennis elbow Tendinitis and tendinopathy Plantar fasciitis Frozen shoulder Achilles tendon concerns Ankle, knee, shoulder, and wrist concerns Chronic musculoskeletal conditions Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation Professionally assessed tendon and ligament concerns Diagnosis, client suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Treatment Mode Selection
Select the ED, anti-cellulite, or physiotherapy interface. Choose the electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the application. Step 3: Tip and Parameter Selection
Install the appropriate treatment tip and select the required energy or pressure, frequency, preload, delivery mode, and number of impacts. Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client response. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the treatment medium, inspect the area, document the selected settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Dual Wave Mini combines dual-technology performance with a portable, space-efficient flight-case design. Key advantages include: Electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave technologies Two selectable professional handpieces Seven electromagnetic treatment heads Eleven pneumatic treatment heads Eighteen treatment tips in total Three dedicated treatment interfaces Adjustable electromagnetic energy and frequency Adjustable pneumatic pressure and frequency Two delivery modes Six customizable preload settings 10.4-inch touchscreen Treatment-area mapping Impact-counting function Reinforced treatment-tip construction Easy pneumatic projectile replacement Rear-mounted storage tank Compact flight-case design 110V and 220V compatibility Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini main unit 1 × Electromagnetic shockwave handpiece 1 × Pneumatic ballistic shockwave handpiece 7 × Electromagnetic treatment heads 11 × Pneumatic treatment heads 18 × Total treatment tips 1 × Integrated 10.4-inch touchscreen Three dedicated treatment interfaces Two treatment-delivery modes Six preload settings Real-time impact counter Rear-mounted storage tank Compact flight case Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Dual-technology operation training Electromagnetic parameter guidance Pneumatic parameter guidance Treatment-tip selection guidance ED protocol training Anti-cellulite protocol training Physiotherapy protocol training Client-screening documentation Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Dual Wave Mini includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both shockwave technologies safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and interface operation Client consultation and screening Electromagnetic handpiece operation Pneumatic handpiece operation Treatment-tip selection Energy, pressure, and frequency adjustment Preload and impact-count settings ED treatment interface Anti-cellulite treatment interface Physiotherapy treatment interface Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance Pneumatic projectile replacement Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Treatment heads, projectiles, seals, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The Dual Wave Mini should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active thrombosis or blood clots Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Severely impaired sensation Active growth plates in children Recent surgery within the treatment area Metal implants requiring medical clearance Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision Additional considerations for ED treatments include: Active infection or inflammation Penile implants or prostheses Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements. Operating Precautions Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and treatment tips before use. Select the correct modality and treatment tip. Begin with conservative treatment settings. Increase energy or pressure progressively according to client response. Use suitable coupling medium where required. Monitor client comfort throughout the treatment. Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment settings and impact counts. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Replace worn projectiles and components as directed. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine facilities Musculoskeletal treatment practices Men’s wellness clinics Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Integrated wellness centers Mobile or multi-location professional practices Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing shockwave treatments. OEM and ODM Customization
Wikbeauty provides OEM and ODM services for professional distributors, clinics, and equipment brands. Available customization may include: Technology configuration External case design Machine color customization Logo placement Interface customization Packaging design Product documentation Distributor branding Final customization options, minimum quantities, production time, and pricing should be confirmed with the Wikbeauty sales team. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini?
Two Shockwave Technologies
The system combines focused electromagnetic energy and radial pneumatic pressure waves for precise and broad-area applications. Eighteen Treatment Tips
Seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads provide extensive treatment flexibility across different anatomical regions. Three Dedicated Interfaces
Separate ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy modes simplify parameter selection, body mapping, and treatment tracking. Compact Flight-Case Design
The 48 × 58 × 50cm flight-case configuration is suitable for smaller treatment rooms, second treatment rooms, storage, transport, and multi-location practices. Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, OEM and ODM options, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Dual Wave Mini?
The Dual Wave Mini is a compact professional ESWT system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one platform. How does it differ from the Dual Wave C?
The Dual Wave Mini provides the same two shockwave modalities in a smaller flight-case design. It includes 18 treatment tips, operates at 300W, weighs 35kg, and has a packing size of 48 × 58 × 50cm. What is the difference between the two handpieces?
The electromagnetic handpiece generates focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas. The pneumatic handpiece creates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue and body applications. How many treatment tips are included?
The system includes 18 tips: seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads. What settings are available for the electromagnetic handpiece?
The electromagnetic handpiece provides energy from 5 to 200mJ and frequency from 1 to 16Hz. What settings are available for the pneumatic handpiece?
The pneumatic handpiece provides pressure from 1 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz. Which treatment modes are available?
The system includes dedicated interfaces for ED treatments, anti-cellulite programs, and physiotherapy applications. Can the machine support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. It includes a dedicated ED interface and two specialized electromagnetic heads. Treatment should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements. Can it be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. The pneumatic handpiece and anti-cellulite interface support body-mapped cellulite and skin-texture programs. Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, condition, selected settings, and individual sensitivity. Parameters can be adjusted during treatment to maintain suitable tolerance. How many sessions are recommended?
Session number and frequency depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and selected protocol. Treatment outcomes and course length should not be guaranteed. Is the system suitable for mobile practitioners?
Its compact flight-case design makes it more portable than a full-size floor-standing system. Safe transport, equipment protection, and suitable treatment-room conditions remain essential. Does Wikbeauty provide OEM and ODM services?
Yes. Available services include equipment configuration, case design, logo customization, interface options, and packaging customization. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers both technologies, treatment-tip selection, parameter adjustment, the three treatment interfaces, client screening, safety, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Compact Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini enables qualified clinics and mobile practitioners to offer electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave treatments using one compact professional platform. Five key benefits: Focused electromagnetic and radial pneumatic technologies Eighteen treatment tips for precise and broad applications Dedicated ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy interfaces Portable flight-case design with a design with a 10.4-inch touchscreen Professional training, OEM and ODM services, and a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, customization options, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Energy
5–200mJ
Adjustable focused acoustic output
Frequency
1–16Hz
Customizable pulse-delivery speed
Treatment Heads
Seven
Different focused applications
ED-Specific Heads
Two
Dedicated professional protocols
Preload Settings
Six
Customizable treatment response
Control Interface
10.4-inch touchscreen
Parameter and protocol management
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Pressure
1–6 Bar
Adjustable radial-wave intensity
Frequency
1–21Hz
Customizable impact-delivery speed
Treatment Heads
Eleven
Broad treatment versatility
Head Diameters
6–25mm
Small and large treatment areas
Tip Replacement
Easy-change mechanism
Efficient treatment preparation
Mechanism
Compressed-air ballistic
Radial pressure-wave generation
Tip Group
Quantity
Primary Applications
Electromagnetic Heads
Seven
Precise and focused treatment areas
ED-Specific Heads
Two of the seven electromagnetic heads
Professional erectile-function protocols
Pneumatic Heads
Eleven
Radial and broad soft-tissue treatments
Pneumatic Tip Diameters
6mm, 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm
Different anatomical areas
Total Treatment Tips
Eighteen
Multi-application treatment coverage
Treatment Category
Common Applications
Recommended Technology
Erectile-Function Programs
Professionally assessed acoustic-wave protocols
Electromagnetic or protocol-selected mode
Cellulite Treatments
Cellulite appearance and body texture
Pneumatic radial
Physiotherapy
Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue treatments
Electromagnetic or pneumatic
Sports Recovery
Muscle, tendon, and activity-related rehabilitation
Protocol-dependent
Musculoskeletal Rehabilitation
Functional recovery and localized discomfort
Focused or radial shockwave
Body Contouring
Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs
Pneumatic radial
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini
Model
Dual Wave Mini
Technology
Electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave
Input Voltage
AC 110V or 220V
Power Consumption
300W
Display
10.4-inch touchscreen
Treatment Handpieces
Two: electromagnetic and pneumatic
Treatment Modes
ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy
Electromagnetic Frequency
1–16Hz
Electromagnetic Energy
5–200mJ
Electromagnetic Heads
Seven, including two ED-specific heads
Pneumatic Frequency
1–21Hz
Pneumatic Pressure
1–6 Bar
Pneumatic Heads
Eleven
Pneumatic Tip Diameters
6mm, 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm
Total Treatment Tips
Eighteen
Delivery Modes
Two
Preload Settings
Six
Special Features
Treatment mapping, impact tracking, storage tank, and easy projectile replacement
Packing Size
48 × 58 × 50cm
Weight
35kg
Design
Compact portable flight case
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
From $2,699.00
Professional EMS Muscle-Toning and Body-Contouring System
Non-Invasive Electrical Muscle Stimulation for Targeted Body Sculpting
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support muscle conditioning, body toning, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles, producing repeated involuntary contractions. These contractions help activate muscle fibers and support structured muscle-toning programs without conventional weight training during treatment.
With multiple treatment applicators, adjustable intensity levels, a clear LCD interface, and portable construction, the system can be used for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves.
EMS muscle stimulation | Multiple applicators | Adjustable intensity | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Electrical Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology sends controlled electrical impulses through the treatment applicators and into targeted muscles. These impulses generate repeated involuntary contractions throughout the selected program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock toning Thigh muscle stimulation Upper-arm definition Calf muscle conditioning General body-toning programs Targeted Body Contouring
Applicators can be positioned over specific muscle groups, enabling practitioners to create personalized treatments according to the client’s body-contouring objectives. Common applications include: Waistline definition Abdominal contouring Buttock shaping Inner- and outer-thigh toning Upper-arm contouring Lower-leg definition Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to the selected area and client comfort. This enables practitioners to begin at a lower setting and increase the stimulation progressively. Common benefits include: Personalized treatment intensity Progressive muscle activation Different settings for different body areas Improved client comfort Structured multi-session programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Conditioning Program
Designed to focus on repeated muscle activation and improved muscle tone in a selected area. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock toning Arm muscle stimulation Thigh and calf conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved muscle definition Clients supplementing regular fitness activities Clients interested in assisted muscle stimulation Body-Contouring Program
Focuses on improving the appearance and definition of selected body areas through targeted EMS treatments. Recommended applications: Waistline contouring Buttock shaping Inner-thigh toning Outer-thigh contouring Upper-arm definition Recommended for: Clients concerned about reduced muscle tone Clients seeking a firmer-looking silhouette Clients following an active and balanced lifestyle Multi-Area Sculpting Program
Allows practitioners to create a structured plan covering several body areas over a series of sessions. Recommended applications: Abdomen and buttocks Abdomen and thighs Arms and abdomen Thighs and calves Complete body-toning packages Recommended for: Clients with several treatment objectives Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning Professional clinics offering treatment packages Maintenance Program
Designed to help clients continue their muscle-conditioning routine after completing an initial treatment course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Seasonal body-shaping programs Continued fitness and wellness support Recommended for: Returning EMS clients Clients who have completed six to eight sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Intensity and Treatment Settings The EMS Sculpting Machine allows treatment intensity to be customized according to the body area, selected protocol, and client comfort. Treatment settings should always be selected according to user suitability, individual tolerance, and the supplied operating instructions. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waist
The applicators can be positioned over the abdominal muscles to support muscle conditioning and midsection definition. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Improved abdominal tone Buttocks and Thighs
Treatments can be customized for the buttocks, inner thighs, outer thighs, and other suitable areas of the legs. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock toning and shaping Inner-thigh muscle conditioning Outer-thigh contouring Lower-body definition Arms and Calves
The system can also support targeted muscle stimulation for smaller treatment areas. Common treatment objectives include: Biceps stimulation Triceps conditioning Upper-arm definition Calf muscle toning Professional Body-Sculpting Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment goals, target areas, and possible contraindications. Explain the expected muscle-contraction sensation and establish realistic treatment objectives. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Choose the appropriate applicators and position them securely over the selected muscle groups. Ensure correct skin contact and avoid prohibited treatment areas. Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate stimulation frequency, intensity, and session duration. Begin at a low intensity and increase it progressively according to the client’s comfort and muscle response. Step 4: EMS Treatment
The system delivers controlled electrical impulses for approximately 30 minutes. The client experiences repeated muscle contractions within the selected treatment area. Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program, and the applicators are removed. Inspect the treatment area and provide any appropriate post-treatment recommendations. Designed for Professional and Personal Treatment Environments
The EMS Sculpting Machine combines customizable body-toning functions with straightforward operation and portable construction. Key advantages include: Professional Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology Multiple body-treatment applicators Adjustable stimulation frequency Ten adjustable intensity levels Treatments for five or more body areas Clear LCD control interface Automatic shut-off Skin-contact sensors Overload protection Lightweight, portable construction 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Customer training and technical support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine Multiple EMS treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Adjustable intensity controls Integrated LCD control interface Standard machine accessories 1 × Region-compatible power cable The final number and configuration of treatment applicators should follow the selected product package. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety instructions Applicator-placement guidance Muscle-conditioning protocols Body-contouring protocol guidance Client consultation materials Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMS Sculpting Machine includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved users operate the system correctly. Training covers: Machine installation and setup LCD interface operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area selection Correct applicator placement Stimulation-frequency adjustment Intensity-level selection Muscle-conditioning protocols Safety procedures and contraindications Applicator cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Consumable accessories and components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A client consultation and health-history review should be completed before professional treatment. The machine must be operated according to the supplied instructions. Treatment may not be suitable for users with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery in the selected area Serious cardiovascular conditions Neurological conditions affecting sensation Severe skin sensitivity Medical conditions affected by electrical stimulation Do not position applicators over the heart, head, front or side of the neck, spine, broken skin, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Users with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning treatment. Operating Precautions Begin every new treatment at a low intensity. Increase the intensity gradually according to comfort. Ensure correct applicator contact before activation. Do not place applicators over prohibited body areas. Inspect applicators and cables before every session. Clean the applicators between professional clients. Keep the machine in a clean, dry environment. Stop treatment if unusual pain or discomfort occurs. Follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Beauty salons Body-contouring studios Wellness centers Fitness and recovery facilities Professional spas Home-based beauty businesses Aesthetic treatment facilities The machine may also be suitable for personal use when operated according to the supplied manual. Professional services must comply with applicable local licensing, insurance, and operating requirements. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine?
Targeted Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to selected muscle groups, supporting structured muscle-conditioning and toning programs. Adjustable Intensity Levels
Ten intensity levels allow users to begin comfortably and increase muscle stimulation progressively according to individual tolerance. Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can support treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves using suitable applicator placement. Portable and Easy to Operate
The lightweight design, clear LCD interface, and straightforward controls make the system suitable for professional facilities and approved personal use. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, training, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMS Sculpting Machine?
It is an Electrical Muscle Stimulation system that delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles for body-toning and muscle-conditioning programs. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment session takes approximately 30 minutes, depending on the selected body area and treatment protocol. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, buttocks, inner and outer thighs, biceps, triceps, and calves. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice per week. The final course should be personalized according to individual suitability and objectives. What does EMS treatment feel like?
Users typically experience repeated muscle contractions, tingling, or pulsing sensations. The intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to comfort. Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The system provides ten adjustable intensity levels and customizable stimulation-frequency settings. Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system uses external applicators and does not require injections, incisions, or surgery. Can EMS replace regular exercise?
EMS treatments should complement rather than replace regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. Can the machine directly remove fat?
The primary function of the system is electrical muscle stimulation. Improved muscle tone may support a more defined appearance, but individual body-composition changes vary and should not be guaranteed. Can it be used at home?
The supplied information indicates suitability for home use. Users must follow the operating manual, observe all contraindications, and begin at a low intensity. Are results the same for every user?
No. Results vary according to the treatment area, selected intensity, number of sessions, muscle condition, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is training included?
Yes. Machine operation, applicator placement, intensity adjustment, safety instructions, cleaning, maintenance, and technical support are included. Add Professional EMS Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine enables salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and body-contouring professionals to introduce customizable muscle-conditioning and body-toning services. Five key benefits: Targeted Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology Multiple applicators for five or more body areas Ten adjustable intensity levels Portable design with a clear LCD interface CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Intensity Levels
1–10
Progressive, comfort-based muscle stimulation
Stimulation Frequency
Adjustable
Customizable treatment protocols
Treatment Applicators
Multiple
Treatments for different muscle groups
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Efficient professional or personal use
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Structured muscle-conditioning program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive treatment planning
Control System
LCD interface
Simple setting and program management
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Suitable Program
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Muscle-conditioning program
Waist
Improve the appearance of body contours
Body-contouring program
Buttocks
Toning and shape enhancement
Muscle or multi-area program
Inner Thighs
Muscle conditioning and leg definition
Body-contouring program
Outer Thighs
Hip and thigh contouring
Multi-area program
Upper Arms
Biceps and triceps stimulation
Muscle-conditioning program
Calves
Lower-leg muscle conditioning
Muscle-conditioning program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine
Technology
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
Stimulation Frequency
Adjustable
Intensity Levels
Levels 1–10
Treatment Applicators
Multiple applicators for different body areas
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly two sessions per week
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves
Display
Clear LCD control interface
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, skin-contact sensors, and overload protection
Power Input
AC 110V or 220V
Design
Lightweight and portable
Suitable Environments
Salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and home use
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Customer training and technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
Pelvic Floor Training, RF Heating and Relaxing Massage in One Chair
The RF EMSEAT Pelvic Floor Trainer combines HI-FEM electromagnetic muscle stimulation with radio-frequency heating for convenient, non-invasive pelvic floor exercise. Designed for women and men, it activates deep pelvic floor muscles while delivering controlled warmth to the back, waist and feet.
Users remain comfortably seated and fully clothed during treatment. A typical 30-minute session can stimulate up to 12,000 pelvic floor muscle contractions, providing an efficient alternative to performing thousands of voluntary Kegel exercises.
Product Highlights
- HI-FEM pelvic floor muscle stimulation
- Up to 12,000 contractions in 30 minutes
- 3.5 Tesla maximum magnetic intensity
- 5–150 Hz adjustable frequency
- RF heating for the back, waist and feet
- Intelligent temperature control
- 4.3-inch control panel
- Comfortable, non-invasive operation
- Suitable for both women and men
- Use while fully clothed
- Integrated tablet stand
- 100–240V wide-voltage compatibility
How the RF EMSEAT Works
The seat generates focused electromagnetic energy that penetrates the pelvic floor area and stimulates repeated muscle contractions. These contractions exercise muscles that can be difficult to activate consistently through voluntary Kegel exercises alone.
Unlike conventional exercise, the user does not need to consciously contract the muscles throughout the session. The intensity and frequency can be adjusted through the control panel according to the selected program and individual comfort level.
The machine also integrates RF heating into the backrest and foot platform, combining pelvic floor exercise with a warm, relaxing seated experience.
Three Technologies in One System
HI-FEM Pelvic Floor Stimulation
The chair delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through the treatment area in the seat. These pulses stimulate deep pelvic floor muscle contractions to support strength, control and endurance.
RF Back and Waist Heating
The integrated backrest provides RF-generated warmth for the back and waist. Intelligent temperature control helps maintain a comfortable treatment temperature of approximately 42–45°C.
RF Foot Massage and Heating
The foot platform provides warming RF energy while the user is seated. Shoes and socks should be removed so the feet can make direct contact with the foot panels.
Supports Women’s Pelvic Wellness
The RF EMSEAT can be incorporated into pelvic floor exercise routines for women seeking support with:
- Postpartum pelvic floor conditioning
- Pelvic muscle strengthening
- Menopause-related pelvic wellness
- Age-related changes in muscle strength
- Core stability and pelvic control
- Intimate wellness
- Daily pelvic floor exercise
Postpartum users should obtain clearance from a qualified healthcare professional before beginning any pelvic floor training program.
Supports Men’s Pelvic Wellness
Pelvic floor training is also important for men. The RF EMSEAT may support exercise programs focused on:
- Pelvic floor muscle activation
- Lower abdominal and core control
- Pelvic muscle endurance
- Prostate wellness routines
- Age-related pelvic muscle conditioning
- General intimate wellness
The chair is designed to accommodate both female and male users, making it suitable for homes, wellness centers and professional studios.
Up to 12,000 Contractions per Session
Traditional Kegel exercises depend on the user correctly identifying and voluntarily contracting the pelvic floor muscles. Maintaining proper technique and completing enough repetitions can be difficult.
The RF EMSEAT automatically produces repeated, controlled contractions throughout the session. In approximately 30 minutes, it can stimulate up to 12,000 muscle contractions, helping users complete an intensive pelvic floor exercise session while seated.
The 12,000-contraction figure describes the machine’s stimulation pulses and does not guarantee a particular medical or physical result.
Comfortable and Convenient Operation
The RF EMSEAT is designed to make pelvic floor exercise straightforward:
- Sit comfortably in the chair while fully clothed.
- Remove shoes and socks before placing your feet on the RF platform.
- Select the desired settings using the 4.3-inch control panel.
- Begin with a comfortable intensity.
- Increase the intensity gradually according to tolerance.
- Remain seated throughout the selected session.
The chair includes an adjustable tablet stand for entertainment or other content during treatment. The tablet shown in product images is not included.
Integrated Design
Every part of the RF EMSEAT is designed to support a comfortable treatment experience:
- Magnetic treatment seat: Delivers electromagnetic pulses to the pelvic floor muscles.
- Heated backrest: Provides RF warmth to the back and waist.
- Foot energy platform: Delivers RF heating through direct contact with bare feet.
- 4.3-inch screen: Provides convenient access to treatment settings.
- Tablet holder: Keeps a personal device within easy reach.
-
Supportive armrests: Help users maintain a relaxed seated position.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | RF EMSEAT |
| Product type | Pelvic floor training chair |
| Core technology | HI-FEM electromagnetic stimulation |
| Additional technology | RF heating and massage |
| Magnetic intensity | Up to 3.5 Tesla |
| Frequency | 5–150 Hz |
| Rated power | 1500W |
| Voltage | 100–240V |
| Control panel | 4.3-inch screen |
| Typical session | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Muscle stimulation | Up to 12,000 contractions per session |
| RF treatment areas | Back, waist and feet |
| RF temperature | Approximately 42–45°C |
| Operation | Non-invasive and fully clothed |
| Package size | 97 × 82 × 83 cm |
| Tablet stand | Included |
| Tablet | Not included |
| Intended users | Women and men |
Specifications may vary slightly by configuration. Confirm the required plug type and final electrical specifications before ordering.
Suitable for Home and Professional Settings
The RF EMSEAT can be used in:
- Private homes
- Beauty and wellness centers
- Postpartum recovery centers
- Fitness studios
- Pelvic wellness practices
- Rehabilitation and physiotherapy settings
Professional operators should follow applicable local regulations, complete appropriate training and screen every client before treatment.
Important Safety Information
Do not use the RF EMSEAT if you are pregnant or have a pacemaker, implanted electronic device or metal implant near the treatment area. People with recent surgery, active infection, unexplained pelvic pain, abnormal bleeding or a diagnosed pelvic health condition should consult a qualified healthcare professional before use.
Extra caution is required because the machine includes RF heating. Users with reduced heat sensitivity, impaired circulation or conditions affected by heat should seek professional advice before treatment.
This product is designed to support pelvic floor exercise and general wellness. It is not intended to diagnose, cure or replace professional medical treatment for urinary incontinence, pelvic organ prolapse, prostatitis, pelvic pain or other medical conditions. Results vary between individuals.
Order the RF EMSEAT Pelvic Floor Trainer
Bring together intensive pelvic floor exercise and relaxing RF warmth in one comfortable system. The RF EMSEAT Kegel Chair offers adjustable 3.5 Tesla magnetic stimulation, up to 12,000 contractions per session and targeted heating for the back, waist and feet.
Select your required voltage and plug configuration and order your RF EMSEAT today.
Receives in 7 days.
Answer a few quick questions and we'll recommend the right Lipo Laser setup for you.
$1,699.00
Professional EMS and Radial Shockwave Therapy System
Dual-Technology Platform for Physiotherapy, Muscle Conditioning, and Rehabilitation
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK is a professional 2-in-1 physiotherapy system that combines Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave therapy on one compact platform.
Its reusable vacuum EMS cups provide hands-free muscle stimulation, while the dedicated shockwave handpiece delivers adjustable acoustic energy to targeted soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Both functions have independent control interfaces and can support combined treatment programs.
With nine EMS modes, dual-channel control, adjustable frequency up to 30Hz, shockwave energy up to 200mJ, a 10.4-inch touchscreen, and an 8kg portable design, EMSHOCK is suitable for physiotherapy, rehabilitation, sports recovery, and professional wellness applications.
EMS and radial shockwave | Hands-free vacuum cups | Nine EMS modes | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform Electrical Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function delivers controlled electrical impulses through reusable vacuum treatment cups. These impulses produce repeated muscle contractions and relaxation cycles without requiring voluntary exercise during treatment. Common applications include: Muscle-conditioning programs Post-injury muscle rehabilitation Muscle-weakness support Atrophy-prevention programs Sports-recovery treatments General muscle stimulation Radial Shockwave Therapy
The shockwave handpiece delivers controlled acoustic energy to selected soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Practitioners can adjust energy, frequency, preload, and total impact count according to the treatment protocol. Common applications include: Tendon and soft-tissue treatments Musculoskeletal rehabilitation Sports-injury recovery Chronic pain-management support Professionally administered ED protocols Selected body-contouring treatments Simultaneous Dual-Technology Operation The self-vacuum EMS cups operate hands-free while the practitioner controls the radial shockwave handpiece. This allows both technologies to be incorporated into the same treatment appointment. This integrated configuration supports: Muscle and connective-tissue treatments Hands-free EMS stimulation Practitioner-controlled shockwave delivery Treatment of the same or different suitable areas Customizable combined protocols Efficient professional workflows Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Conditioning Program
Uses the EMS function to provide controlled muscle stimulation through one or two independently managed channels. Recommended applications: Muscle strengthening support Muscle endurance programs Post-injury muscle conditioning Reduced muscle-use concerns General rehabilitation support Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Rehabilitation clients Athletes and active adults Clients with professionally assessed muscle weakness Physiotherapy Shockwave Program
Uses adjustable radial shockwave parameters for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and soft-tissue concerns. Recommended applications: Tendon and connective-tissue treatments Shoulder, elbow, wrist, and hand programs Hip, knee, ankle, and foot treatments Plantar-area treatments Chronic musculoskeletal concerns Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Clients with professionally assessed soft-tissue conditions Rehabilitation and recovery clients Combined EMS and Shockwave Program
Combines hands-free EMS treatment with practitioner-controlled radial shockwave therapy during the same appointment. Recommended applications: Muscle and tendon rehabilitation Post-injury recovery Sports-rehabilitation programs Combined muscle and soft-tissue treatment Functional recovery support Recommended for: Clients requiring multi-layer treatment Sports and rehabilitation clients Clinics offering combined physiotherapy programs Sports-Recovery Program
Uses EMS muscle stimulation, radial shockwave therapy, or both technologies according to the treatment objective. Recommended applications: Muscle recovery Tendon overuse conditions Post-activity conditioning Sports-injury rehabilitation Return-to-activity support Recommended for: Athletes Active adults Fitness clients Sports-recovery facilities Nine Adjustable EMS Treatment Modes
The EMS function provides nine treatment modes with adjustable frequency and energy. Mode selection should follow client assessment and the supplied professional protocols. Dual-Channel Independent Control
Channel A and Channel B can be managed separately, allowing professionals to customize settings for different muscle groups or suitable treatment areas. Common benefits include: Independent intensity adjustment Separate treatment settings Two-area muscle stimulation Personalized client programs Flexible rehabilitation planning Reusable Self-Vacuum Cups
The EMS cups use suction to maintain contact with suitable treatment areas. Common benefits include: Hands-free operation Reusable applicators No adhesive electrode pads Reduced disposable-accessory requirements Efficient applicator placement Adjustable Shockwave Treatment Settings
The radial shockwave function allows practitioners to personalize the treatment according to the selected area and professional protocol. Shockwave settings must be selected according to client assessment, target tissue, treatment objective, and individual response. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
The EMS cups and shockwave handpiece support various upper-body muscle and soft-tissue programs. Common treatment areas include: Shoulder Upper back Elbow Forearm Hand and wrist Suitable upper-arm muscle groups Lower-Body Areas
The two technologies can be selected independently or incorporated into a combined treatment plan. Common treatment areas include: Hip Thigh Knee Calf Achilles tendon Foot and ankle Plantar area Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Suitable professional protocols may also support selected body-contouring and intimate wellness services. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist Buttocks Thighs Localized body areas Professionally assessed ED treatment zones Professional Treatment Applications Common Musculoskeletal Applications EMSHOCK may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with: Tennis elbow Tendinitis and tendinopathy Plantar fasciitis Frozen shoulder Achilles tendon concerns Ankle, knee, shoulder, and wrist concerns Muscle weakness Post-injury muscle atrophy Chronic musculoskeletal conditions Suitable calcium-deposit concerns Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation Sports-related overuse conditions Diagnosis, client suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Technology and Area Selection
Choose EMS, radial shockwave, or a combined treatment. Identify the appropriate muscle groups and professionally assessed shockwave treatment areas. Step 3: Applicator and Parameter Setup
Position the vacuum EMS cups over suitable muscle groups. Select Channel A or B settings, EMS mode, frequency, and energy. Configure shockwave energy, frequency, preload, and impact count. Step 4: Active Treatment
Begin the selected EMS program. When appropriate, the practitioner can deliver radial shockwave therapy to the same or another suitable area while the EMS cups operate hands-free. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop both functions, remove the EMS cups, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSHOCK combines two professional treatment technologies within a lightweight and portable desktop system. Key advantages include: EMS and radial shockwave technologies Hands-free reusable vacuum EMS cups Nine EMS treatment modes Adjustable EMS frequency up to 30Hz Ten EMS energy levels Dual-channel independent EMS control Shockwave energy up to 200mJ Adjustable shockwave frequency and preload Integrated impact counter Body-part selection menu Independent treatment interfaces 10.4-inch color touchscreen 150W power consumption Compact 46 × 53 × 38cm design Lightweight 8kg construction 100–220V power compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Professional training and lifetime support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSHOCK main unit 1 × Radial shockwave treatment handpiece Reusable self-vacuum EMS treatment cups Dual-channel EMS connection system Integrated 10.4-inch color touchscreen Nine EMS treatment modes Independent Channel A and Channel B controls Adjustable shockwave control system Integrated body-part selection menu Real-time impact counter Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories The final number and configuration of EMS cups and shockwave heads should follow the selected package. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions EMS operation training Shockwave operation training Vacuum-cup placement guidance EMS mode and intensity guidance Shockwave parameter guidance Physiotherapy protocol training Sports-recovery protocol training Combined-treatment guidance Client-screening documentation Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSHOCK system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both technologies safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and interface operation Client consultation and screening Vacuum EMS cup placement Channel A and Channel B controls EMS mode selection EMS frequency and energy adjustment Shockwave handpiece operation Shockwave energy and frequency adjustment Preload and impact-count settings Combined EMS and shockwave treatments Physiotherapy and sports-recovery protocols Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Shockwave heads, projectiles, seals, vacuum cups, tubing, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A detailed health consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. EMSHOCK should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active thrombosis or blood clots Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate clearance Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Severely impaired sensation Active growth plates in children Recent surgery within the treatment area Metal implants requiring professional clearance Serious cardiovascular conditions Neurological conditions affected by electrical stimulation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Do not place EMS applicators or deliver shockwave energy over prohibited anatomical regions, including areas identified as unsuitable in the operating manual. Additional considerations for ED treatments include: Active infection or inflammation Penile implants or prostheses Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cups, tubing, cables, and accessories before use. Select the correct technology and treatment protocol. Position vacuum cups only on suitable muscle areas. Begin with conservative energy and frequency settings. Increase intensity progressively according to client response. Use suitable coupling medium for shockwave treatment. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas. Record EMS and shockwave settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine facilities Musculoskeletal treatment practices Fitness and recovery centers Men’s wellness clinics Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Integrated wellness facilities Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMS or shockwave treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSHOCK?
Two Technologies on One Platform
The system combines Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave therapy for muscle, tendon, soft-tissue, and recovery programs. Hands-Free Vacuum EMS Cups
Reusable self-vacuum cups maintain contact without adhesive pads, allowing the EMS function to operate while the practitioner performs suitable shockwave treatments. Independent Dual-Channel Control
Channel A and Channel B can be configured separately for personalized muscle-stimulation programs. Portable Professional Design
At 8kg with a compact desktop footprint, EMSHOCK is suitable for treatment rooms, multi-room facilities, and professional transport. Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is EMSHOCK?
EMSHOCK is a professional 2-in-1 system combining Electrical Muscle Stimulation with radial shockwave therapy. What is the difference between the two technologies?
EMS delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles. Radial shockwave delivers acoustic pressure waves to professionally identified soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Can both functions be used during the same appointment?
Yes. The vacuum EMS cups can operate hands-free while a practitioner delivers shockwave treatment to the same or another suitable area, when supported by the selected protocol. How are the vacuum cups different from adhesive electrodes?
The reusable cups use suction to maintain contact and do not require disposable adhesive pads. Correct placement, suction level, cleaning, and client screening remain essential. How many EMS modes are available?
The system includes nine EMS treatment modes, adjustable frequency up to 30Hz, and ten energy levels. Can two muscle groups be treated?
The machine includes two independently controlled EMS channels. Suitable treatment configurations depend on the number of cups supplied and the selected protocol. What is the maximum shockwave energy?
The radial shockwave function provides maximum energy up to 200mJ. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, back, hip, thigh, knee, calf, Achilles tendon, foot, ankle, abdomen, buttocks, and other professionally assessed areas. How long does a treatment take?
Shockwave treatment may take approximately 10 minutes per area. EMS sessions commonly take 20–30 minutes. Combined appointment time depends on the selected protocol and number of areas. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocols indicate three to four shockwave sessions for some conditions and six to twelve EMS sessions for muscle-conditioning programs. The final plan should be individualized following professional assessment. Can EMSHOCK support ED treatment protocols?
The shockwave function may support professionally administered ED protocols. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements. Is treatment uncomfortable?
EMS commonly produces pulsing and muscle-contraction sensations. Shockwave may cause temporary discomfort over sensitive areas. Both technologies have adjustable settings to support appropriate client tolerance. Are treatment results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to the condition, treatment area, selected settings, number of sessions, client health, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers EMS, shockwave therapy, vacuum-cup placement, parameter selection, combined protocols, safety, client screening, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Dual-Technology Physiotherapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK enables qualified professionals to combine hands-free muscle stimulation and radial shockwave therapy using one lightweight platform. Five key benefits: Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave technology Nine EMS modes with independent dual-channel control Reusable hands-free vacuum EMS cups Adjustable shockwave energy up to 200mJ CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
EMS Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Treatment Modes
Nine
Different muscle-stimulation patterns
Maximum Frequency
30Hz
Adjustable stimulation speed
Energy Levels
1–10
Progressive intensity control
Output Channels
Two independent channels
Treatment of two suitable muscle groups
Maximum Output
100V
Professional EMS delivery
Applicators
Reusable vacuum cups
Hands-free muscle stimulation
Channel Control
Channel A and Channel B
Independent parameter management
Shockwave Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Maximum Energy
200mJ
Adjustable acoustic-wave output
Frequency
Adjustable
Personalized impact-delivery speed
Preload
Adjustable
Controlled handpiece response
Impact Counter
Real-time tracking
Accurate session documentation
Body-Part Menu
Integrated
Protocol and treatment-area selection
Control Interface
Independent touchscreen interface
Shockwave parameter management
Typical Area Time
Approximately 10 minutes
Efficient targeted treatments
Treatment Category
Common Applications
Recommended Technology
Muscle Conditioning
Muscle activation, endurance, and strength support
EMS
Physiotherapy
Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue programs
Shockwave or combined
Sports Recovery
Muscle, tendon, and activity-related rehabilitation
EMS and shockwave
Post-Injury Rehabilitation
Muscle conditioning and functional recovery
Combined program
Body Contouring
Muscle-toning and selected body programs
EMS or combined
Erectile-Function Programs
Professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols
Shockwave
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSHOCK
Model
ESWT-KA
Technology
Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave
Power Input
100–220V, 60Hz
Power Consumption
150W
Maximum Shockwave Energy
200mJ
Shockwave Controls
Energy, frequency, preload, and impact count
EMS Maximum Output
100V
EMS Frequency
Adjustable up to 30Hz
EMS Treatment Modes
Nine
EMS Energy Levels
Levels 1–10
EMS Channels
Two independently controlled channels
EMS Applicators
Reusable self-vacuum cups
Display
10.4-inch color touchscreen
Control System
Independent EMS and shockwave interfaces
Dimensions
46 × 53 × 38cm
Net Weight
8kg
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$1,999.00
Professional Two-Handle Portable HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System Compact Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across targeted body areas. High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 20,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its two ergonomic applicators support focused or bilateral treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks. With a lightweight portable design, adjustable energy settings, intelligent digital controls, and an air-cooling system, the machine is suitable for mobile beauty professionals, small salons, clinics, wellness facilities, and approved home users. Portable HI-EMT | Two ergonomic handles | Approximately 20,000 contractions | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Body-definition programs Professional fitness treatments Focused Body Contouring
The two applicators can be positioned over suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Buttock shaping Thigh definition Upper-arm conditioning Bilateral muscle stimulation Sequential multi-area treatments Portable Professional Operation
The compact construction supports professional services in facilities with limited space and suitable mobile treatment environments. Common benefits include: Easier professional transportation Reduced storage requirements Small treatment-room compatibility Focused two-handle operation Flexible service locations Approved personal-use capability Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses one or two applicators to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Midsection definition General abdomen sculpting Fitness-support programs Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock-Toning Program
Positions both applicators over suitable buttock muscle areas to support balanced conditioning. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Toning and firmness support Bilateral buttock treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving lower-body programs Thigh and Arm Program
Uses the two applicators sequentially or bilaterally across suitable thigh or upper-arm areas. Recommended applications: Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Upper-arm muscle stimulation Bilateral limb treatments Arm and thigh definition General muscle conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm or thigh tone Clients interested in upper- or lower-body conditioning Fitness and body-contouring clients Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning EMSlim clients Clients completing four to six initial sessions Approved home users following the supplied instructions Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device allows treatments to be customized according to the body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen
One or two applicators can be positioned over suitable abdominal muscle groups for focused midsection treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Improved muscle definition Midsection body sculpting Bilateral abdominal treatment Buttocks and Thighs
The two applicators support focused, sequential, or bilateral lower-body programs. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Lower-body definition Bilateral muscle treatment General lower-body sculpting Upper Arms
The applicators can be positioned over suitable upper-arm muscle groups according to the supplied placement guidance. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Biceps conditioning Triceps conditioning Bilateral arm treatment Improved-looking arm definition Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment area and position one or both applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with a conservative energy level. Increase the intensity progressively according to client comfort and muscle response. Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The machine delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment area, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional and Portable Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device combines HI-EMT performance with a compact and transportable design. Key advantages include: Professional HI-EMT technology Two ergonomic treatment applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session Focused and bilateral treatment capability Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks Adjustable energy intensity Intelligent digital control interface Air-cooling system Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Four- to six-session treatment programs Lightweight and compact construction Easier transportation and storage 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim main unit 2 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories Intelligent digital control interface Adjustable energy controls Integrated air-cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Applicator-placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal treatment protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Mobile-use guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved home users operate the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Intelligent control operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Correct applicator placement Focused and bilateral configurations Energy-level adjustment Abdominal treatment protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Client monitoring Safe transportation and storage Post-treatment guidance Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, transport damage, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper transportation, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before treatment. The machine should only be operated according to the supplied instructions. Treatment may not be suitable for users with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Users with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Place the machine on a stable, dry surface. Ensure ventilation openings remain unobstructed. Remove metal objects from the treatment area. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure both handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with a conservative energy level. Increase intensity progressively according to user comfort. Monitor muscle response and user condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment area, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every professional client. Transport the machine using suitable protective packaging. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device is suitable for appropriately trained operators and approved users in: Mobile beauty services Small beauty salons Body-contouring studios Wellness centers Medical spas Fitness facilities Professional clinics Personal home wellness environments Professional operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device? Compact Portable Design
The lightweight construction supports easier transportation, storage, and use in facilities with limited space. Two Ergonomic Applicators
Two handles support focused, sequential, and bilateral treatments for suitable muscle groups. Professional HI-EMT Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session. Simple Controls and Air Cooling
The intelligent digital interface and air-cooling system support straightforward portable operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device?
It is a compact HI-EMT body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation and body-conditioning treatments. What makes the machine portable?
Its lightweight, compact construction is designed for easier carrying, storage, and transportation between suitable treatment locations. How does HI-EMT technology work?
The machine delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during treatment. How many applicators are included?
The package includes two ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators. Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, upper arms, thighs, and buttocks. Can both applicators operate simultaneously?
Yes. The two handles support focused or bilateral treatment according to the selected protocol. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Users experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy can be increased progressively according to comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Users can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced following exercise may occur. Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may users notice changes?
Some users may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course. What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes. How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Can the machine be used at home?
The supplied information indicates home-wellness suitability. Home users must follow the operating manual, contraindications, applicator-placement instructions, and recommended treatment schedule. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses air cooling to support stable portable operation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, transportation, maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting. Add Portable HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device enables mobile professionals, small salons, clinics, and wellness practitioners to provide focused electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments with a compact system. Five key benefits: Portable HI-EMT technology with approximately 20,000 contractions Two ergonomic applicators for focused or bilateral treatments Compact design for transportation and space-efficient storage Intelligent digital controls with air cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, portability details, package configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
HI-EMT
Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Treatment Handles
Two
Focused, sequential, or bilateral treatments
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Four to six sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive muscle conditioning
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized user comfort
Cooling System
Air cooling
Supports stable portable operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
One or two handles
Core Area
Focused muscle activation
Bilateral or targeted placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Two-handle bilateral treatment
Inner Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Outer Thighs
Thigh definition and muscle stimulation
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Multiple Areas
Structured body-sculpting program
Sequential treatment sessions
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
Design
Portable, lightweight, and compact
Treatment Handles
Two ergonomic applicators
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Primary Functions
Muscle conditioning and body contouring
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Treatment Configuration
Focused, sequential, or bilateral
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Four to six sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air cooling
Display
Intelligent digital interface
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Use Cases
Mobile professionals, small salons, clinics, and approved home use
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,599.00
Professional Four-Handle HIEMT PRO Body-Sculpting System
Dual-Client Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Multi-Area Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is a professional body-sculpting system developed for simultaneous muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Advanced High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its four-handle configuration supports multi-area treatment for one client or simultaneous treatment for two suitable clients.
With adjustable energy settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, dual-client operation, and combined air-and-water cooling, the PRO system is designed for premium clinics, medical spas, body-sculpting studios, fitness centers, resort spas, and high-volume wellness facilities.
Advanced HIEMT | Four ergonomic handles | Dual-client operation | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HIEMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy, treatment objectives, and selected protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen treatments
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Customized four-area programs
Dual-Client Operation
The four-handle configuration can be arranged to treat one client across multiple areas or two suitable clients simultaneously.
Common benefits include:
-
Single-client multi-area treatments
-
Simultaneous dual-client sessions
-
Flexible applicator allocation
-
Improved treatment-room efficiency
-
Customized treatment programs
-
High-volume clinic operation
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for bilateral lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Multi-Area Body Program
Uses all four applicators for one client across multiple suitable treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Abdomen and arms
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Customized four-area treatment
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning
-
Clients with multiple treatment objectives
-
Premium body-sculpting clients
Dual-Client Program
Divides the four applicators between two appropriately screened clients.
Recommended applications:
-
Two-client abdomen programs
-
Simultaneous lower-body treatments
-
Independent client protocols
-
High-volume treatment scheduling
-
Professional dual-client services
Recommended for:
-
Clinics with appropriate staffing
-
High-volume body-sculpting facilities
-
Premium spas and wellness centers
Each client must receive an individual consultation, screening, treatment plan, applicator placement, and continuous professional monitoring.
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO allows practitioners to customize treatments according to the selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | Advanced HIEMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area or dual-client treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Treatment Capacity | One or two suitable clients | Flexible professional operation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Multiple handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support balanced lower-body treatments across suitable buttock and thigh muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Multiple Body Areas
Four handles allow professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Simultaneous arm and abdomen treatment
-
Simultaneous thigh and buttock treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Two or more handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
| Dual Clients | Simultaneous independent treatment programs | Handles divided between two clients |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review each client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. During dual-client operation, each client must receive individually assessed applicator placement.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy levels. Adjust the settings according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: HIEMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor every client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO combines multi-area and dual-client performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling.
Key advantages include:
-
Advanced HIEMT technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Single-client multi-area capability
-
Simultaneous dual-client capability
-
Focused and bilateral treatment configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO |
| Designation | PRO professional configuration |
| Technology | High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 |
| Treatment Capacity | One client across multiple areas or two suitable clients |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, simultaneous, bilateral, or dual-client |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Results Timeline | Supplied estimate: visible changes in 2–4 weeks and progressive changes over 6–12 weeks |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures and timelines are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO main unit
-
4 × Ergonomic HIEMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Single-client multi-area protocols
-
Dual-client treatment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Single-client multi-area operation
-
Dual-client treatment setup
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review must be completed for every client before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Complete separate screening for every client.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Continuously monitor every client during dual-client operation.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Luxury wellness facilities
-
Resort spas
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness centers
-
Slimming centers
-
High-volume treatment facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIEMT or dual-client treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
Advanced HIEMT Technology
The system provides approximately 30,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four handles support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and suitable dual-client treatment programs.
Flexible Dual-Client Operation
The applicators can be divided between two appropriately screened clients, providing additional scheduling flexibility for high-volume facilities.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes machine training, dual-client guidance, applicator-placement protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
It is a professional HIEMT body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, multi-area body conditioning, and suitable dual-client operation.
What does the PRO designation mean?
PRO identifies this product as the supplied advanced four-handle configuration with approximately 30,000 contractions, a 12-inch touchscreen, dual-client capability, and air-and-water cooling.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four ergonomic HIEMT treatment handles.
Can all four handles be used on one client?
Yes. All four handles can be positioned across suitable treatment areas according to the client’s individual treatment plan.
Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
Yes. The four handles can be divided between two suitable clients. Each client requires individual screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can HIEMT replace regular exercise?
HIEMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
The supplied information indicates that visible changes may begin within two to four weeks and continue developing over six to twelve weeks. Individual results vary.
What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied product information lists potential muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The system uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, multi-handle placement, dual-client protocols, energy adjustment, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Advanced Dual-Client HIEMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO enables premium clinics, resort spas, wellness centers, and body-sculpting professionals to provide multi-area or simultaneous dual-client muscle-conditioning treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Advanced HIEMT with approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Four ergonomic handles for multi-area treatment
-
Flexible single-client or dual-client operation
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 7 days.
From $600.00
Professional HIEMT and Radiofrequency Body Sculpting System
Four Treatment Handles for Muscle Stimulation and Body-Contouring Programs
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is a professional dual-technology platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system combines High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscle groups, while RF provides controlled thermal energy for suitable body-care and skin-firming protocols.
Four treatment handles support individual or simultaneous multi-area programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, calves and obliques. The system can be upgraded to six or eight handles.
HIEMT and RF technology | Four treatment handles | 16-Tesla magnetic field | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform HIEMT Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses to selected muscle groups. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Gluteal muscle programs Thigh conditioning Upper-arm stimulation Calf-muscle programs General body conditioning Radiofrequency Energy
The RF function provides controlled heating across suitable treatment areas. Common applications include: Skin-firming support Body-contour refinement Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs General body-care services Repeated Muscle Contractions
The system produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session. Common applications include: Core-conditioning support Muscle-activation programs Muscle-toning services Fitness-oriented treatments Body-sculpting programs Maintenance sessions Four-Handle Multi-Area Treatment
Four handles allow practitioners to create individual or simultaneous treatment protocols. Common applications include: Abdomen and obliques Left and right thighs Buttocks and thighs Upper arms Calves Customized multi-area programs The appropriate handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF temperature and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customized HIEMT and RF programs for different body areas. Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and deep-core muscle areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-conditioning support Abdomen contour programs Oblique muscle stimulation Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Body-sculpting clients Busy professionals Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups. Recommended applications: Gluteal muscle stimulation Buttock-conditioning programs Muscle-tone support Lower-body contour care Recommended for: Fitness clients Body-contouring studios Wellness-center members Clients seeking lower-body conditioning Program 3: Thighs and Calves
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups. Recommended applications: Quadriceps stimulation Hamstring programs Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Calf-muscle activation Recommended for: Athletes Fitness enthusiasts Lower-body conditioning programs Professional wellness services Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps, triceps and forearm areas. Recommended applications: Biceps stimulation Triceps stimulation Forearm conditioning Upper-arm contour support Recommended for: Fitness-center clients Upper-body programs Body-sculpting services Customized muscle-conditioning plans Adjustable Energy for Customized Treatments The EMSlim HIEMT Machine provides adjustable HIEMT intensity and radiofrequency settings for different body areas and client tolerance levels. The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity, RF energy and client comfort. New clients should begin with conservative HIEMT and RF settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Four treatment handles support professional programs across multiple body areas. Core and Upper-Body Treatments Abdomen Core muscles Obliques Biceps Triceps Forearms Lower-Body Treatments
Buttocks Quadriceps Hamstrings Inner thighs Outer thighs Calves Combined Body Programs
Abdomen and obliques Abdomen and thighs Buttocks and thighs Left and right upper arms Customized multi-area courses Maintenance-oriented programs Professional Muscle and Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF settings, session duration and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment objectives, previous procedures and contraindications. 2. Handle Placement
The selected treatment areas are prepared. Conductive gel is applied where required, and the treatment handles are positioned and secured according to the operating protocol. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the HIEMT intensity, RF settings, treatment program and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance. 4. HIEMT and RF Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses and controlled RF energy through the selected handles. A typical treatment lasts approximately 30 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the handles are removed and the treatment areas are cleaned. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance. Temporary warmth, muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur after treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines HIEMT and RF technologies with four treatment handles and professional cooling for continuous operation. Key operating advantages include: HIEMT electromagnetic stimulation Controlled radiofrequency energy 16-Tesla magnetic field Four treatment handles Upgradeable six- or eight-handle configurations Pre-programmed treatment protocols Water-cooling system 110V–240V power compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment handles and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One EMSlim HIEMT main unit Four HIEMT and RF treatment handles Handle-positioning straps Handle-connection components One starter bottle of conductive gel Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Treatment table when included with the selected order Documentation and Training
English operating manual Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup Handle-placement guidance HIEMT-intensity adjustment RF-setting guidance Pre-programmed treatment protocols Client-positioning guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Setup assistance Certificate of Authenticity Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Treatment-handle installation Handle placement by muscle group HIEMT-intensity adjustment RF parameter selection Abdomen and core programs Gluteal muscle programs Thigh and leg programs Upper-arm programs Multi-handle operation Client-comfort monitoring Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Three-Year Warranty
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is supported by a three-year comprehensive warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system HIEMT energy components Radiofrequency components Water-cooling system Original treatment handles Handle cables and connectors Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect handle placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of straps, cables and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic and radiofrequency equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe neurological conditions Active or suspected blood clots Hernia in the treatment area Recent surgery Open wounds or severe skin conditions Acute inflammation Severe muscle injury Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be assessed before treatment. RF temperature and HIEMT intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Fitness centers Medical spas Wellness clinics Body-sculpting studios Beauty salons Sports and recovery centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their body-conditioning services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine? Combine HIEMT and RF
The system combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with controlled radiofrequency energy in one professional platform. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Four handles support professional programs for the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves. Customize Every Session
Adjustable HIEMT intensity, RF settings and pre-programmed protocols allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups and client tolerance. Expand the System
The standard four-handle configuration can be upgraded to six or eight handles for greater treatment capacity. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year comprehensive warranty, professional training, setup assistance and ongoing customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does the EMSlim HIEMT Machine work?
The machine combines HIEMT electromagnetic pulses with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscles, while RF provides controlled heating for suitable body-care protocols. What is the 16-Tesla electromagnetic field?
The supplied specification describes a 16-Tesla magnetic-field output used to deliver high-intensity electromagnetic stimulation through the treatment handles. What does the four-handle design provide?
Four handles allow practitioners to treat individual or multiple suitable body areas during one session. The system can also be upgraded to six or eight handles. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps, forearms and calves. How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional course may include approximately 4–6 sessions, commonly scheduled one or two times per week. The final protocol depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions and warmth from RF. The intensity and RF settings should remain within the client’s tolerance. Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue, soreness, warmth or redness may occur. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The comprehensive warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add HIEMT and RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine combines: High-intensity focused electromagnetic stimulation Controlled radiofrequency energy Four treatment handles with upgrade options Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs Three-year comprehensive warranty and ongoing support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its handle configurations, treatment protocols and professional training. Order Your EMSlim HIEMT Machine and Request Pricing
Treatment Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Intensity
First-time clients and initial muscle activation
Moderate Intensity
General professional muscle-conditioning programs
Higher Intensity
Appropriately selected experienced clients
Customized HIEMT and RF
Muscle-specific protocols based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Fitness or Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
HIEMT and RF
Core stimulation and contour support
Obliques
HIEMT and RF
Side-body muscle conditioning
Buttocks
HIEMT
Gluteal muscle stimulation
Thighs
HIEMT and RF
Lower-body conditioning
Upper arms
HIEMT and RF
Biceps and triceps stimulation
Calves
HIEMT
Calf-muscle activation
Multiple areas
Four-handle operation
Simultaneous professional treatment
Maintenance
Customized program
Ongoing muscle and body-care support
Specification
Details
Product Name
EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine
Product Type
Professional HIEMT and RF body-sculpting system
Technology
High-intensity electromagnetic technology stimulation and radiofrequency
Electromagnetic Field
16 Tesla
Treatment Handles
Four, upgradeable to six or eight
Programmed Contractions
More than 20,000 to 30000 per session
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Suggested Protocol
Approximately 4–6 sessions, one or two times per week
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, arms and calves
Control Interface
Touchscreen with pre-programmed protocols
Cooling System
Water-cooled for continuous professional operation
Power Supply
110V–240V
Warranty
Three-year comprehensive warranty
Support
Customer support by email, telephone and WhatsApp
Receives in 7 days.
Buy 2+ machines and save up to 15% — get a personalized quote within 24 hours.
$2,399.00
Professional Two-Handle HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System Focused Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across primary treatment areas. High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces repeated supramaximal muscle contractions without requiring voluntary exercise during treatment. The two-handle configuration supports focused or bilateral treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, and thighs. With approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session, adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, air-circulation cooling, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for slimming clinics, fitness centers, physiotherapy facilities, and aesthetic salons. HI-EMT technology | Two ergonomic handles | 20–30-minute sessions | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the selected treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Body-definition programs Assisted muscle activation Professional fitness treatments Focused Body Contouring
The two applicators can be positioned over primary body-sculpting areas according to the client’s anatomy and treatment goals. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Buttock shaping Thigh definition Core-area treatments Bilateral muscle stimulation Sequential multi-area programs Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Energy intensity can be customized according to the selected body area, client comfort, and treatment objective. Common benefits include: Progressive muscle activation Personalized treatment intensity Focused body-area programs Bilateral treatment capability Structured treatment courses Maintenance-session planning Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses one or two applicators to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Midsection definition General abdomen sculpting Fitness-support programs Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock-Toning Program
Positions the applicators over suitable buttock muscle areas to support conditioning and shape-enhancement programs. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Toning and firmness support Bilateral buttock treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving lower-body sculpting programs Thigh-Conditioning Program
Uses the two handles for sequential or bilateral treatments across suitable thigh areas. Recommended applications: Thigh muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Lower-body definition Bilateral leg programs General thigh contouring Recommended for: Clients seeking improved thigh tone Clients interested in lower-body conditioning Fitness and body-contouring clients Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatments following completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning EMSlim clients Clients completing four to six initial sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatment intensity according to the body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen
One or two handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal muscle groups for focused midsection treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Improved muscle definition Midsection body sculpting Bilateral abdominal treatment Buttocks
Both handles can support balanced treatment across the buttock muscles. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Toning and shaping Improved-looking firmness Bilateral lower-body treatment General buttock conditioning Thighs
The two applicators can be used sequentially or bilaterally across suitable thigh areas. Common treatment objectives include: Thigh muscle conditioning Inner-thigh programs Outer-thigh programs Lower-body definition Bilateral muscle stimulation Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment area and position one or both applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced and effective muscle stimulation. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with a conservative energy level. Increase the intensity progressively according to the client’s comfort and muscle response. Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment area, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine combines focused HI-EMT performance with simplified professional operation. Key advantages include: Professional HI-EMT technology Two ergonomic treatment handles Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session Focused and bilateral treatment capability Treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, and thighs Adjustable energy intensity Intelligent touchscreen interface Air-circulation cooling system Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Four- to six-session treatment programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim main unit 2 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories Intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls Integrated air-circulation cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Applicator-placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Correct applicator placement Bilateral and sequential configurations Energy-level adjustment Abdominal treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Remove metal objects from the treatment area. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure the handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with a conservative energy level. Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort. Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment area, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Slimming clinics Body-contouring centers Aesthetic salons Medical spas Fitness centers Gyms Wellness facilities Physiotherapy and recovery centers Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine? Focused HI-EMT Technology
The system provides intensive electromagnetic muscle stimulation for targeted abdomen, buttock, and thigh programs. Two Ergonomic Applicators
Two handles support focused, sequential, and bilateral treatments without the operational complexity of larger multi-handle systems. Simplified Professional Operation
The intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy settings, and focused treatment areas make the machine straightforward to integrate into professional services. Primary Body-Area Versatility
One system supports customized programs for the abdomen, buttocks, and thighs. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional HI-EMT system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, body conditioning, and contouring treatments. How does HI-EMT technology work?
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during the treatment session. How many applicators are included?
The package includes two ergonomic HI-EMT treatment handles. Which areas can be treated?
The primary treatment areas are the abdomen, buttocks, and thighs. Can both handles be used simultaneously?
Yes. The two handles support suitable bilateral or focused treatment configurations according to the selected protocol. How long does one treatment take?
A standard session takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with suitable recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. The intensity can be adjusted progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced following exercise may occur. Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively throughout and after the treatment course. How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Are results guaranteed?
Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine enables slimming clinics, fitness facilities, physiotherapy centers, and aesthetic professionals to provide focused muscle-conditioning and body-contouring treatments using one professional platform. Five key benefits: High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology Two ergonomic handles for focused or bilateral treatments Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session Adjustable energy with intelligent touchscreen controls CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
HI-EMT
Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Treatment Handles
Two
Focused, sequential, or bilateral treatments
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000–30,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Four to six sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive muscle conditioning
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized client comfort
Cooling System
Air circulation
Supports stable professional operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
One or two handles
Core Area
Focused muscle activation
Bilateral or targeted placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Two-handle bilateral treatment
Inner Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Outer Thighs
Thigh definition and muscle stimulation
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Multiple Areas
Structured body-sculpting program
Sequential treatment sessions
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
Treatment Handles
Two ergonomic applicators
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000–30,000
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, buttocks, and thighs
Treatment Configuration
Focused, sequential, or bilateral
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Four to six sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air circulation
Display
Intelligent touchscreen
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,399.00
Professional EMSlim Body-Sculpting System
Smart Fat Reduction, Muscle Toning, and Skin-Firming Technology
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is a professional, non-invasive system designed to support fat reduction, muscle development, body contouring, and firmer-looking skin within one treatment platform.
The system combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy. Electromagnetic pulses stimulate powerful muscle contractions while controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue, supporting fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments.
Equipped with four ergonomic applicators, an intelligent touchscreen, and 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty centers, spas, wellness businesses, gyms, fitness studios, and professional body-contouring providers.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Applicators | 20–30-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT energy penetrates the treatment area and stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle toning Buttock muscle stimulation Arm definition Thigh toning Core-strengthening support Improved muscle conditioning Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled radiofrequency energy heats the treatment area while the electromagnetic function stimulates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat-reduction treatments and improves the appearance of skin firmness. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction support Abdominal contouring Waistline shaping Thigh and arm treatments Skin-firming programs Smoother-looking body contours Combined Body-Contouring Technology
The simultaneous use of electromagnetic muscle stimulation and RF energy allows professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality during the same treatment program. Common applications include: Muscle building and definition Fat-reduction support Full-body contouring Buttock toning Improved skin firmness Post-weight-loss body shaping Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Toning Program
A focused treatment program designed to stimulate muscle contractions and improve the appearance of strength, firmness, and definition. Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, arms, and thighs. Recommended for: Clients seeking greater muscle definition and improved body tone without intensive conventional exercise during treatment. Fat-Reduction Program
A professional protocol that combines electromagnetic stimulation with controlled RF heating to support the reduction of localized fat deposits. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. Recommended for: Clients with stubborn body areas that may not respond sufficiently to diet and exercise alone. Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A combined protocol developed to support muscle tone, fat reduction, skin firmness, and improved body contours during one structured treatment course. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible area combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits rather than a single-function treatment. Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone and body-contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated areas requiring periodic muscle stimulation or contour maintenance. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want occasional maintenance treatments. Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings Energy and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s response, treatment area, physical condition, and professional operating protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for combined muscle-toning and body-contouring treatments. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Improved core definition Waistline contouring Localized fat-reduction support Firmer-looking abdominal skin Improved midsection shape Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Ergonomic applicators can be positioned on compatible upper-body muscle groups to support toning and definition. Treatment objectives include: Upper-arm toning Biceps and triceps stimulation Improved muscle definition Localized contouring Firmer-looking skin Buttocks and Thigh Areas
The machine supports lower-body programs developed to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles while improving body contours. Treatment objectives include: Buttock toning and firming Gluteal muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Improved lower-body definition Localized fat-reduction support More balanced body proportions Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s goals, medical history, physical condition, previous treatments, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Identify the treatment area, evaluate muscle condition, and determine the appropriate applicator placement and treatment program. Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position and secure the treatment applicators over the selected muscle groups according to the professional operating protocol. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, electromagnetic intensity, and RF level through the intelligent touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the intensity gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, exercise, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine combines professional HI-EMT and RF technology with four applicators and an intelligent control system. Key advantages include: Combined muscle stimulation and RF technology Four ergonomic treatment applicators Muscle toning and fat-reduction support Multiple body-treatment applications Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Structured 4–6-session treatment courses 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen Air and water circulation cooling 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications The stated muscle-contraction equivalent is a product-performance comparison and should not be interpreted as an exact substitute for conventional exercise. Treatment experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, muscle condition, lifestyle, settings, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine 4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators Compatible applicator straps Standard handle connections 1 × Compatible power cable Standard machine accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Applicator-placement instructions Treatment-protocol guidance Safety and contraindication information Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional operating training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional training and technical guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers operate the EMSlim system safely and confidently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Applicator positioning HI-EMT energy adjustment RF setting adjustment Treatment-area selection Client consultation procedures Contraindication screening Treatment-course planning Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting After-sales technical assistance Ongoing support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising during normal professional operation. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are provided. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting guidance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed explanation of the technical issue. Submit clear photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect machine operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Operation without the required cooling conditions Water damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and other consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. The system should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Severe liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled diabetes Active infection or inflammation Open wounds or damaged skin Recent surgery in the treatment area Severe muscle injuries Abdominal or inguinal hernia Reduced sensation in the treatment area Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with medical conditions or implanted devices should consult a qualified healthcare professional before receiving treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a consultation before every initial treatment. Inspect the machine, cables, applicators, and cooling system before operation. Position applicators over suitable muscle groups only. Secure each applicator correctly before beginning treatment. Start with a low electromagnetic intensity. Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance. Monitor RF warmth and client comfort throughout the session. Do not place applicators over the head, chest, heart, or injured tissue. Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, abnormal discomfort, or skin irritation. Do not exceed the recommended session duration. Maintain sufficient spacing between sessions. Clean and disinfect applicators after every client. Follow the required cooling and maintenance procedures. Use a stable and correctly grounded power source. Maintain appropriate client-treatment records. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Beauty salons Body-contouring centers Medical spas where locally permitted Wellness facilities Gyms and fitness studios Slimming centers Professional muscle-toning providers Entrepreneurs entering the aesthetic-equipment market Users should complete appropriate operating training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine? 1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The machine combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness within one treatment program. 2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four treatment applicators provide flexible positioning and support efficient single-area or multi-area protocols. 3. Multiple Body Applications
The system supports professional treatments for the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. 4. Intelligent Professional Operation
A 10–12-inch touchscreen, adjustable settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient use in busy professional environments. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, ongoing technical assistance, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with radiofrequency energy. HI-EMT stimulates powerful muscle contractions while RF heats the surrounding tissue to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments. Q: What is the difference between HI-EMT and RF?
HI-EMT primarily stimulates muscle contractions, while radiofrequency delivers controlled thermal energy to the tissue. Combining them supports muscle toning, body contouring, and skin-firming objectives. Q: What results can the machine support?
The machine supports improved muscle tone, greater body definition, localized fat reduction, firmer-looking skin, and more balanced body contours. Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system works externally and does not require needles, incisions, anesthesia, or surgical procedures. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally feel strong muscle contractions and controlled warmth. Comfort varies, so intensity should be adjusted gradually and monitored throughout the treatment. Q: How long does one treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions, with around two sessions per week when suitable. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice improved muscle activation or firmness after several sessions. More developed changes generally appear progressively during and after the treatment course. Individual outcomes vary. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. Q: Can multiple areas be treated?
The machine includes four applicators, allowing professionals to create flexible treatment configurations according to the selected protocol and machine controls. Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim should complement, not replace, regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and a healthy lifestyle. Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to their normal activities after a session. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to post-exercise sensations may occur. Q: Can the machine help build muscle?
HI-EMT technology stimulates repeated muscle contractions and can support improved muscle tone and conditioning through a structured treatment course. Q: Can it reduce fat?
The combined HI-EMT and RF treatment supports localized fat-reduction programs. Outcomes depend on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment settings, and completed course. Q: Does it tighten the skin?
Controlled RF energy can support collagen-related skin-firming treatments and improve the appearance of skin texture. Q: Is the treatment suitable for everyone?
Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance guidance. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add Professional EMSlim Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine provides clinics, salons, wellness centers, and fitness businesses with a professional solution for muscle toning, fat-reduction support, body contouring, and skin firming. Five key benefits: Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology Four ergonomic applicators Efficient 20–30-minute treatment sessions Multiple body-treatment applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
HI-EMT Energy
Adjustable electromagnetic intensity
Allows muscle stimulation to be adapted to the treatment area and client tolerance
RF Energy
Adjustable controlled tissue heating
Supports fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Enables flexible single-area or multi-area treatment
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Supports efficient professional appointment scheduling
Treatment Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Provides a structured program for progressive results
Session Frequency
Approximately two sessions per week
Supports consistent muscle stimulation and body contouring
Control Interface
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient treatment selection and adjustment
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports temperature management during professional operation
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Enables operation in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Muscle Toning
Abdomen
Stimulate abdominal muscles and improve definition
Waistline Contouring
Waist and sides
Support a slimmer and more balanced waistline
Buttock Toning
Buttocks
Stimulate gluteal muscles and improve firmness
Thigh Sculpting
Inner and outer thighs
Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours
Arm Definition
Upper arms
Support biceps and triceps conditioning
Localized Fat Reduction
Compatible body areas
Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits
Skin-Firming Treatment
Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of skin firmness
Muscle Conditioning
Selected muscle groups
Support strength, tone, and muscle activation
Post-Weight-Loss Contouring
Abdomen, thighs, arms, and buttocks
Improve body shape and muscle definition
Maintenance Treatment
Previously treated areas
Help maintain muscle tone and contouring results
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology and Radiofrequency
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Primary Functions
Fat reduction, muscle building, muscle toning, skin firming, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Recommended Frequency
Approximately two sessions per week
Muscle Contractions
Claimed equivalent of up to 30,000 crunches or squats per session
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display and Controls
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
Receives in 7 days.
From $1,799.00
Professional Configurable HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System Flexible Two- or Four-Handle Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas. High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Depending on the selected model, the system can include two or four ergonomic treatment applicators. With adjustable energy settings, an intelligent digital touchscreen, air-and-water circulation cooling, and flexible single-area or multi-area operation, the system is suitable for slimming clinics, fitness centers, physiotherapy facilities, wellness centers, and beauty salons. HI-EMT technology | Two- or four-handle options | Flexible treatment configuration | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Waistline definition Professional fitness treatments Flexible Body-Contouring Programs
The selected two- or four-handle configuration supports focused, bilateral, sequential, or multi-area applicator placement. Common applications include: Abdomen and waist treatments Buttock and thigh programs Upper-arm conditioning Bilateral muscle stimulation Single-area focused treatment Customized multi-area programs Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Energy intensity can be customized according to the selected body area, client comfort, and treatment objective. Common benefits include: Progressive muscle activation Personalized treatment intensity Focused body-area treatments Bilateral treatment capability Structured treatment courses Maintenance-session planning Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Midsection definition Waistline sculpting General abdominal programs Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions the applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for focused or bilateral lower-body treatment. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving lower-body programs Upper-Body and Multi-Area Program
Uses the available applicators for customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations. Recommended applications: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Abdomen and arm treatments Waistline and abdomen Buttocks and thighs Customized multi-area body sculpting Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm definition Clients with multiple body-conditioning objectives Clients receiving four-handle treatment programs Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning EMSlim clients Clients completing four to six initial sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device allows practitioners to customize treatment according to the model configuration, selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waistline
The applicators can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Improved abdominal tone Multi-zone midsection treatment Buttocks and Thighs
The available applicators support focused or bilateral treatments across suitable lower-body muscle groups. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatments Improved-looking definition Lower-body body sculpting Arms and Multiple Body Areas
The configurable applicator system allows professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Arm definition Arm and abdomen treatments Thigh and buttock treatments Customized multi-area programs Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the available applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response. Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device combines configurable HI-EMT performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling. Key advantages include: Professional HI-EMT technology Choice of two or four treatment handles Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline Adjustable energy intensity Intelligent digital touchscreen Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Four- to six-session treatment programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim main unit 2 or 4 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories Intelligent digital touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls Air-and-water circulation cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card The selected two- or four-handle configuration should be confirmed when placing the order. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Applicator-placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal treatment protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty EMSlim Device includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Correct applicator placement Two- and four-handle configurations Bilateral and multi-area treatments Energy-level adjustment Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Remove metal objects from each treatment area. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with conservative energy levels. Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort. Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Slimming clinics Body-contouring centers Aesthetic salons Medical spas Fitness centers Gyms Wellness facilities Physiotherapy and recovery centers Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim Device? Configurable HI-EMT Technology
Businesses can select a two- or four-handle model according to their treatment services, client volume, and operational requirements. Flexible Applicator Options
The available configurations support focused, bilateral, sequential, and multi-area treatment programs. Multiple Body Areas
One system supports professional programs for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline. Professional Cooling and Controls
The intelligent digital touchscreen and air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty EMSlim Device?
It is a professional HI-EMT system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, body conditioning, and body-contouring treatments. How does HI-EMT technology work?
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during treatment. How many applicators are included?
The machine is available with two or four ergonomic applicators, depending on the selected model. Which configuration should I choose?
A two-handle model is suitable for focused or bilateral treatments. A four-handle model provides greater flexibility for multi-area treatment programs. Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur. Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course. How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, model configuration, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, cooling-system maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting. Add Configurable HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device enables slimming clinics, fitness facilities, wellness centers, and aesthetic professionals to select a professional configuration suited to focused or multi-area muscle-conditioning treatments. Five key benefits: High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology Flexible two- or four-handle configurations Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session Intelligent touchscreen controls with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for model selection, product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
HI-EMT
Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Treatment Handles
Two or four, model-dependent
Focused, bilateral, or multi-area treatments
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000–30,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Four to six sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive muscle conditioning
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized client comfort
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous professional operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Focused or bilateral placement
Waistline
Contouring and core-area stimulation
Targeted or combined placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Bilateral placement
Inner Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Outer Thighs
Thigh definition and muscle stimulation
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Focused or bilateral treatment
Multiple Areas
Comprehensive body-sculpting program
Four-handle model
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSlim Device
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
Treatment Handles
Two or four ergonomic applicators, model-dependent
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000–30,000
Primary Functions
Muscle conditioning and body contouring
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
Treatment Configuration
Focused, sequential, bilateral, or multi-area
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Four to six sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Results Timeline
Progressive changes during and after the treatment course
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display
Intelligent digital touchscreen
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,599.00
Professional Four-Handle HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System Multi-Area Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for simultaneous muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas. High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces repeated supramaximal muscle contractions without requiring voluntary exercise during treatment. The four-handle configuration supports simultaneous or independent placement across the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline. With approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session, adjustable energy settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, and combined air-and-water cooling, the system is designed for premium clinics, medical spas, body-sculpting studios, fitness centers, and wellness facilities. HI-EMT technology | Four ergonomic handles | Multi-area treatments | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Waistline definition Professional fitness treatments Simultaneous Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy, treatment objectives, and selected protocol. Common applications include: Abdomen and thigh treatments Arms and abdomen treatments Buttocks and thighs Waistline and abdomen Bilateral muscle stimulation Customized multi-area programs Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Energy intensity can be customized for each selected body area according to client comfort and treatment objectives. Common benefits include: Progressive muscle activation Personalized treatment intensity Simultaneous multi-area treatment Bilateral treatment capability Structured treatment courses Maintenance-session planning Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Midsection definition Waistline sculpting General abdominal programs Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock-Toning Program
Positions two or more applicators over suitable buttock and lower-body muscle areas. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Toning and firmness support Bilateral buttock treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs Thigh and Arm Program
Uses the four applicators for bilateral or simultaneous treatments across suitable thigh and arm areas. Recommended applications: Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Upper-arm muscle stimulation Bilateral leg treatments Arm and thigh definition Multi-area body sculpting Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm or thigh tone Clients interested in upper- and lower-body conditioning Fitness and body-contouring clients Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatments after completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Multi-area body-contour maintenance Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning EMSlim clients Clients completing four to six initial sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to the selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waistline
Multiple handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Improved abdominal tone Multi-zone midsection treatment Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support balanced lower-body treatments across suitable buttock and thigh muscle groups. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatments Improved-looking definition Lower-body body sculpting Arms and Multiple Body Areas
Four handles allow professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Arm definition Simultaneous arm and abdomen treatment Simultaneous thigh and buttock treatment Customized four-area programs Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy levels. Adjust each applicable treatment setting according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response. Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine combines multi-area HI-EMT performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling. Key advantages include: Professional HI-EMT technology Four ergonomic treatment handles Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session Simultaneous multi-area capability Focused and bilateral treatment configurations Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline Adjustable energy intensity 12-inch intelligent touchscreen Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Four- to six-session treatment programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim main unit 4 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories 12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls Air-and-water circulation cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Applicator-placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal treatment protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Correct applicator placement Simultaneous and bilateral configurations Energy-level adjustment Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment planning Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Remove metal objects from each treatment area. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with conservative energy levels. Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort. Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Premium body-sculpting clinics Medical spas Aesthetic salons Fitness centers Gyms Wellness facilities Slimming centers Physiotherapy and recovery centers Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine? Multi-Area HI-EMT Technology
Four applicators support simultaneous electromagnetic muscle stimulation across multiple suitable body areas. Four Ergonomic Applicators
The four-handle configuration supports focused, bilateral, and multi-area treatment programs. Professional Cooling System
Combined air-and-water circulation helps maintain stable performance during continuous professional operation. Advanced Touchscreen Control
The 12-inch intelligent touchscreen and adjustable settings support efficient multi-area treatment management. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional HI-EMT system developed for simultaneous electromagnetic muscle stimulation, body conditioning, and multi-area contouring programs. How does HI-EMT technology work?
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during the treatment session. How many applicators are included?
The package includes four ergonomic HI-EMT treatment handles. Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline. Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
Yes. The four-handle configuration supports suitable simultaneous, bilateral, or multi-area treatments according to the selected protocol. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced following exercise may occur. Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively throughout and after the treatment course. What results are listed for this system?
The supplied product information lists potential muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These are not guaranteed results, and individual outcomes vary. How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Are results guaranteed?
Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, multi-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, cooling-system maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting. Add Professional Multi-Area HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, fitness centers, and aesthetic professionals to provide simultaneous muscle-conditioning and multi-area body-contouring treatments. Five key benefits: High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology Four ergonomic handles for simultaneous multi-area treatments Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
HI-EMT
Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Treatment Handles
Four
Simultaneous, focused, or bilateral treatments
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000–30,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient multi-area treatment
Treatment Course
Four to six sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive muscle conditioning
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized client comfort
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous professional operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Two or more handles
Waistline
Contouring and core-area stimulation
Targeted or combined placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Bilateral handle placement
Inner Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Bilateral treatment
Outer Thighs
Thigh definition and muscle stimulation
Bilateral treatment
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Bilateral treatment
Multiple Areas
Comprehensive body-sculpting program
Up to four handles
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000–30,000
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
Treatment Configuration
Focused, simultaneous, or bilateral
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Four to six sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$3,999.00
Professional Four-Handle NEO EMShape Body-Sculpting System Straight and Curved Electromagnetic Applicators for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple body areas. The machine combines advanced EMShape technology with four ergonomic applicators: two straight handles for conventional placement and two curved handles designed for improved contact across contoured body areas. With approximately 20,000 muscle contractions per session, adjustable treatment settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, air-and-water cooling, and a professional vertical design, the system is suitable for body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, fitness facilities, and wellness studios. EMShape technology | Two straight and two curved handles | Vertical tower design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform EMShape Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
EMShape technology delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Waistline definition Calf muscle stimulation Straight and Curved Applicator Treatment
The system includes two straight and two curved applicators for different body shapes and placement requirements. Common benefits include: Conventional straight-handle placement Improved contact on contoured body areas Focused muscle stimulation Bilateral treatment capability Multi-area treatment flexibility Customized applicator positioning Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Abdomen and thigh treatments Arms and abdomen Buttocks and thighs Waistline and love-handle areas Bilateral calf treatments Customized multi-area programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal and Waistline Program
Uses suitable straight or curved applicators to stimulate abdominal muscles and support midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Waistline sculpting Love-handle-area programs General midsection definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for lower-body treatment. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs Arm and Calf Program
Uses suitable applicators for upper-arm and calf muscle-conditioning treatments. Recommended applications: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Biceps and triceps conditioning Calf muscle stimulation Bilateral limb treatments Improved-looking muscle definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm or calf tone Fitness and body-contouring clients Clients requiring smaller-area applicator placement Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial NEO EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Multi-area conditioning Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning NEO EMSlim clients Clients completing six to eight initial sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to applicator type, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waistline
Straight or curved handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Love-handle-area treatment Multi-zone midsection sculpting Buttocks and Thighs
Curved and straight applicators support customized placement across suitable lower-body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatment Improved-looking definition Lower-body sculpting Arms and Calves
The applicator selection supports suitable upper-arm and lower-leg treatment programs. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Arm definition Calf muscle conditioning Bilateral limb treatment Customized smaller-area programs Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Selection and Placement
Select straight or curved handles according to the treatment area and client anatomy. Position and secure the applicators over suitable muscle groups. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response. Step 4: EMShape Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine combines EMShape technology with straight and curved applicator options. Key advantages include: Professional EMShape technology Four ergonomic treatment handles Two straight applicators Two curved applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations Treatments for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, and calves Vertical professional design Adjustable energy intensity 12-inch intelligent touchscreen Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Six- to eight-session treatment programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim main unit 2 × Straight EMShape treatment applicators 2 × Curved EMShape treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories 12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls Air-and-water circulation cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Straight-handle placement guidance Curved-handle placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Straight-handle placement Curved-handle placement Applicator selection by body area Energy-level adjustment Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment planning Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Remove metal objects from each treatment area. Select the correct straight or curved applicator. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with conservative energy levels. Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort. Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record applicator type, treatment area, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Premium body-sculpting clinics Medical spas Slimming centers Aesthetic salons Fitness facilities Gyms Wellness centers Professional body-contouring studios Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMShape or HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine? Straight and Curved Applicators
Two straight and two curved handles support customized placement across different body shapes and treatment areas. Professional EMShape Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session. Multiple Treatment Areas
One machine supports customized programs for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, straight- and curved-handle guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional electromagnetic body-sculpting system with two straight and two curved applicators. What is EMShape technology?
EMShape is the supplied electromagnetic muscle-stimulation technology used by this system to produce repeated involuntary muscle contractions. What is different about the curved handles?
The curved applicators are designed to improve placement and contact across suitable contoured body areas. Correct selection depends on the client’s anatomy and treatment area. Do curved handles guarantee deeper muscle engagement?
No. Treatment depth and response depend on electromagnetic output, applicator position, client anatomy, settings, and individual response. How many applicators are included?
The package includes four handles: two straight applicators and two curved applicators. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
The four-handle system supports suitable multi-area operation according to the selected protocol and machine configuration. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur. Can EMShape replace regular exercise?
EMShape treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course. What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-definition improvement of up to 30% and fat reduction of up to 20%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes. How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, applicator selection, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, straight- and curved-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Curved-Handle EMShape Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, and wellness professionals to provide customized electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments using straight and curved applicators. Five key benefits: Professional EMShape electromagnetic technology Two straight and two curved ergonomic applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
EMShape electromagnetic stimulation
Muscle-conditioning treatments
Treatment Handles
Four
Multi-area treatment capability
Straight Handles
Two
Conventional and precise placement
Curved Handles
Two
Contoured and ergonomic placement
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Six to eight sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive muscle conditioning
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized client comfort
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Applicator Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Straight or curved handles
Waistline
Contouring and core-area stimulation
Curved-handle placement
Love Handles
Side-body conditioning
Curved-handle placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Bilateral curved or straight handles
Inner and Outer Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Suitable bilateral placement
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Straight handles
Calves
Lower-leg muscle conditioning
Suitable straight or curved handles
Multiple Areas
Comprehensive body-sculpting program
Up to four handles
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine
Technology
HI-EMT with EMShape technology
Design
Vertical tower
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Straight Handles
Two
Curved Handles
Two
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Primary Functions
Muscle conditioning and body contouring
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 30% increased muscle definition and 20% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves
Treatment Configuration
Focused, bilateral, or multi-area
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,999.00
Professional Pelvic Floor Strengthening System
Non-Invasive HIFEM Technology for Pelvic Wellness and Bladder-Control Programs
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system developed for pelvic floor strengthening, postpartum wellness, bladder-control support, and intimate wellness programs.
High-intensity focused electromagnetic energy stimulates deep pelvic floor muscles and produces approximately 12,000 muscle contractions during a 28–30-minute session. Clients remain comfortably seated and fully clothed throughout the treatment.
With adjustable power, customizable frequency settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and pre-programmed protocols, the system enables professionals to personalize every session according to the client’s comfort level and treatment objectives.
12,000 contractions per session | 28–30-minute treatment | Fully clothed | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Advanced HIFEM Technology on One Professional Platform High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
The system generates focused electromagnetic energy that penetrates the pelvic floor area and stimulates powerful involuntary muscle contractions. These contractions engage muscles more intensively and consistently than conventional voluntary exercises. Common applications include: Pelvic floor muscle strengthening Bladder-control support Postpartum wellness programs Intimate wellness treatments Core stability support Age-related pelvic muscle conditioning Supramaximal Muscle Contractions
Each session produces approximately 12,000 supramaximal contractions. The client does not need to perform manual exercises, allowing the system to provide consistent muscle activation throughout the treatment. Common benefits include: Consistent pelvic muscle engagement Improved muscle strength and endurance Convenient treatment without manual exercise Personalized intensity according to client comfort Structured treatment programs with repeatable settings Fully Clothed, Non-Invasive Treatment
Clients remain seated and fully clothed during the entire session. No applicators are inserted into the body, and the procedure requires no injections, incisions, anesthesia, or complicated preparation. This discreet treatment experience is suitable for professional environments where client privacy, comfort, and convenience are essential. Select the Right Program for Each Client Postpartum Wellness Program
Designed to support pelvic floor conditioning following pregnancy and childbirth, subject to professional assessment and appropriate medical clearance. Recommended applications: Postpartum pelvic muscle weakness Reduced pelvic floor tone Bladder leakage concerns Core stability support Recommended for: Postpartum clients Women seeking non-invasive pelvic wellness support Clients who find manual pelvic floor exercises difficult Bladder-Control Support Program
Provides targeted pelvic floor muscle stimulation for clients experiencing weakness associated with bladder-control concerns. Recommended applications: Stress-related urinary leakage Leakage during coughing or sneezing Leakage during physical activity Reduced bladder-support muscle strength Recommended for: Women and men with pelvic floor weakness Mature clients Clients seeking a non-surgical support program Intimate Wellness Program
Focuses on improving pelvic muscle tone, awareness, endurance, and control as part of a professional intimate wellness service. Recommended applications: Reduced pelvic muscle tone Pelvic floor conditioning Intimate wellness support Confidence and body-awareness programs Recommended for: Women’s wellness centers Intimate wellness clinics Clients seeking discreet, non-invasive treatment Pelvic Strength and Maintenance Program
Created for clients who want ongoing pelvic floor conditioning after completing an initial treatment course. Recommended applications: Pelvic muscle maintenance Core foundation support Age-related muscle conditioning Long-term wellness programs Recommended for: Existing pelvic floor clients Mature women and men Clients completing a structured treatment course Customizable Power and Frequency Settings The system allows professionals to adjust treatment intensity according to the client’s needs, tolerance, and program objectives. Treatment settings and session frequency should always be selected following professional consultation and client screening. Professional Pelvic Wellness Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, pelvic wellness concerns, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Determine whether professional or medical clearance is required. Step 2: Comfortable Positioning
The client sits comfortably in the treatment chair while remaining fully clothed. Correct seating alignment helps position the pelvic floor area over the electromagnetic treatment zone. Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate program, power level, frequency, and treatment duration. Begin at a comfortable intensity and adjust progressively according to the client’s response. Step 4: HIFEM Treatment
The system generates repeated electromagnetic pulses for approximately 28–30 minutes. The client experiences strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions while remaining comfortably seated. Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program automatically. The client can leave the treatment area immediately unless the practitioner provides individual aftercare recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair combines professional performance with a discreet, comfortable client experience. Key advantages include: Approximately 12,000 contractions per session Fully clothed and non-invasive treatment Adjustable 300W–5000W power output Customizable 3–200Hz frequency range Intelligent digital touchscreen Pre-programmed treatment protocols Automatic shut-off and intensity controls Multiple professional color options Universal 110V–240V power compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing technical support Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair 1 × Integrated intelligent touchscreen control system Pre-programmed treatment protocols Adjustable power and frequency controls 1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable Selected professional chair color Documentation and Training
English user manual Operating and safety guid Standard treatment protocol templates Postpartum wellness protocol guidance Bladder-control support protocol guidance Intimate wellness protocol guidance Client consultation and education materials Service-menu and treatment-package guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes professional operating guidance to help your team use the system confidently and responsibly. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and program operation Client consultation and screening Correct client positioning Power and frequency adjustment Treatment protocol selection Safety procedures and contraindications Machine cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Service planning and client communication Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and share photographs or video when required. A technician will assess the machine remotely. Operating guidance or replacement parts will be arranged when applicable. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before treatment. This system must be operated according to the supplied manual and applicable local requirements. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Active infection or inflammation Recent surgery in the treatment area Unexplained pelvic pain or bleeding Epilepsy or conditions affected by electromagnetic stimulation Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning a pelvic floor treatment program. Intended Professional Users
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Women’s wellness centers Gynecology and pelvic wellness practices Medical spas Physiotherapy and rehabilitation centers Postpartum wellness centers Intimate wellness clinics Professional beauty and wellness facilities Local licensing and operating requirements should be reviewed before offering treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
Approximately 12,000 Contractions per Session
Advanced HIFEM technology provides intensive pelvic floor muscle stimulation during a convenient 28–30-minute session. Discreet Client Experience
Clients remain fully clothed and comfortably seated, creating a private and convenient treatment experience without invasive applicators. Personalized Professional Programs
Adjustable power, frequency, and protocol settings allow practitioners to tailor sessions according to client comfort and treatment objectives. Multiple Wellness Applications
One system supports postpartum wellness, bladder-control programs, intimate wellness, core conditioning, and pelvic floor maintenance services. Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system that uses focused electromagnetic energy to stimulate repeated pelvic floor muscle contractions while the client remains comfortably seated. How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 28–30 minutes, depending on the selected protocol and the client’s individual treatment plan. Does the client remain fully clothed?
Yes. Clients can remain fully clothed throughout the session. Lightweight clothing that does not contain metal is generally the most appropriate. How many contractions occur during one session?
The system is designed to generate approximately 12,000 pelvic floor muscle contractions during a complete session. Is the treatment invasive?
No. The treatment does not require surgery, injections, internal applicators, or anesthesia. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients typically experience strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions. Intensity can be adjusted progressively to maintain an appropriate comfort level. How many sessions are recommended?
The source protocol recommends two sessions per week over an 8–12-week program. The final schedule should be personalized following professional consultation. When may clients notice changes?
Individual experiences vary. Some clients may notice increased pelvic muscle awareness during the early stages of a program, while strength and functional changes generally require a consistent series of sessions. Can the chair be used for postpartum clients?
It can be incorporated into postpartum wellness programs after an appropriate professional assessment and medical clearance when necessary. Is the system suitable for men?
The technology may also support pelvic floor conditioning programs for suitable male clients, subject to professional screening and an appropriate treatment plan. Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The power output and frequency can be adjusted according to the selected protocol, treatment objective, and client comfort. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Operating guidance, safety training, treatment protocol instruction, and ongoing technical support are included. Add Professional Pelvic Wellness to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair enables clinics and wellness centers to introduce a discreet, non-invasive pelvic floor service supported by advanced HIFEM technology. Five key benefits: Approximately 12,000 contractions in a 28–30-minute session Fully clothed and non-invasive client experience Adjustable power, frequency, and treatment protocols Multiple pelvic wellness applications on one platform CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Power Output
300W–5000W
Adjustable treatment intensity
Frequency Range
3–200Hz
Customizable muscle-stimulation patterns
Session Duration
28–30 minutes
Efficient professional treatment
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Structured pelvic wellness programs
Treatment Position
Seated and fully clothed
Discreet, convenient client experience
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Protocol and intensity management
Treatment Category
Primary Objective
Suitable Clients
Postpartum Wellness
Support pelvic floor muscle recovery and conditioning
Postpartum clients with appropriate clearance
Bladder-Control Support
Strengthen muscles associated with bladder support
Women and men with pelvic floor weakness
Intimate Wellness
Improve pelvic muscle tone, control, and awareness
Adult wellness clients
Menopause Support
Support pelvic muscle conditioning during age-related changes
Menopausal and postmenopausal clients
Core Stability
Strengthen the pelvic foundation supporting the core
Clients seeking posture and stability support
Maintenance Programs
Help maintain pelvic muscle strength after a treatment course
Returning wellness clients
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair
Technology
HIFEM High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
Primary Application
Pelvic floor strengthening and intimate wellness
Power Output
300W–5000W adjustable
Frequency Range
3–200Hz
Session Duration
Approximately 28–30 minutes
Contractions per Session
Approximately 12,000
Treatment Position
Seated and fully clothed
Control System
Intelligent digital touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Pre-programmed and customizable protocols
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature control, and intensity limits
Available Colors
Orange, pink, blue, and white
Power Supply
110V–240V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
From $2,399.00
Professional Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine
Dual-Technology Muscle Building, Fat Reduction, and Skin-Firming System
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system that combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy.
HI-EMT energy stimulates powerful supramaximal muscle contractions, while controlled RF heating supports fat metabolism, collagen production, and firmer-looking skin. This combination enables professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality within one treatment program.
The system includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy levels, and air-and-water circulation cooling. It is designed for slimming clinics, aesthetic centers, gyms, wellness facilities, physiotherapy centers where locally permitted, and professional body-contouring businesses.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Ergonomic Applicators | Dual-Client Capability | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform HI-EMT Muscle Stimulation
High-intensity focused electromagnetic energy stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone. The supplied product specification states that one 30-minute session can generate approximately 20,000–30,000 muscle contractions. These contractions support muscle activation, conditioning, firmness, and improved definition. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle toning Gluteal muscle stimulation Thigh conditioning Upper-arm definition Core-strengthening support Improved muscle firmness Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue while the electromagnetic function activates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat metabolism, collagen stimulation, and improved skin firmness. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction support Waistline contouring Abdominal shaping Thigh and arm treatments Skin-firming programs Smoother-looking body contours Four-Applicator Multi-Area Treatment
The system includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options. The different handle shapes help professionals position applicators securely over a variety of body contours and muscle groups. Depending on the machine configuration and treatment protocol, the applicators can support multi-area treatments or sessions for two suitable clients simultaneously. Common applications include: Simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas Abdomen and waistline programs Buttock and thigh treatments Arm and abdominal combinations Two-client treatment workflows High-volume professional scheduling Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Building and Toning Program
A focused HI-EMT program designed to stimulate powerful muscle contractions and improve the appearance of tone, strength, and definition. Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients seeking stronger-looking muscles, improved definition, and enhanced body tone. Fat-Reduction and Skin-Firming Program
A combined HI-EMT and RF protocol designed to support localized fat reduction while improving the appearance of skin firmness. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, thighs, buttocks, and arms. Recommended for: Clients with localized fat deposits and reduced skin firmness in compatible treatment areas. Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A dual-technology program that addresses muscle tone, localized fat, skin quality, and body shape within one structured treatment course. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible treatment combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits instead of a single-function treatment. Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone, definition, and body-contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated muscle groups and body areas. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want periodic maintenance treatments. Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings HI-EMT and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s physical condition, treatment area, muscle response, skin sensation, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdominal and waist areas are suitable for combined muscle-stimulation, fat-reduction, and skin-firming programs. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Improved abdominal definition Core-conditioning support Waistline contouring Localized fat-reduction support Firmer-looking abdominal skin Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Straight or curved applicators can be positioned over compatible upper-body muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy. Treatment objectives include: Biceps and triceps stimulation Upper-arm toning Improved muscle definition Localized contouring Firmer-looking skin Better upper-body proportions Buttocks and Thigh Areas
Curved applicators can follow compatible lower-body contours to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles. Treatment objectives include: Buttock lifting and toning Gluteal muscle stimulation Thigh conditioning Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Localized fat-reduction support Improved lower-body definition Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s body-contouring goals, medical history, physical condition, previous procedures, implanted devices, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Assess the selected treatment area, identify the target muscle groups, and determine the most appropriate applicator shape and placement. Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position the straight or curved applicators securely over the selected muscle groups. Confirm that all straps and connections are correctly fitted before starting treatment. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, HI-EMT intensity, and RF level through the 12-inch touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the energy gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated areas, and provide hydration, stretching, physical activity, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations. Mild temporary muscle soreness may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine combines dual-technology performance, flexible applicator positioning, and intelligent controls for professional body-contouring environments. Key advantages include: Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology Four ergonomic treatment applicators Straight and curved handle options Multi-area treatment capability Dual-client workflow capability Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Structured 4–6-session treatment courses 12-inch intelligent touchscreen Adjustable treatment intensity Air-and-water circulation cooling 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications The stated contraction count, result timeline, and result duration are supplied product-performance estimates. Individual experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, physical condition, diet, activity level, treatment settings, treatment frequency, and maintenance. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine 4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators Straight and curved applicator options Compatible applicator straps Standard handle connections 1 × Compatible power cable Standard operating accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Touchscreen operating instructions Applicator-placement guidance HI-EMT and RF treatment protocols Contraindication and safety guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional operator training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers use the EMSlim RF system correctly and confidently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Touchscreen operation Straight and curved applicator selection Correct applicator positioning HI-EMT energy adjustment RF intensity adjustment Multi-area treatment planning Dual-client workflow guidance Client consultation and contraindication screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Treatment-course planning Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults occurring under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are supplied. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed description of the technical issue. Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem. Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect machine operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Operation without the required cooling conditions Water damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every initial treatment. The machine should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or plans to become pregnant Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Active muscle injury or severe inflammation Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled diabetes Open wounds or damaged skin Recent surgery in the intended treatment area Abdominal or inguinal hernia Reduced sensation in the treatment area Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with implanted devices, metal implants, serious medical conditions, or recent surgery should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a detailed health screening before treatment. Assess the client’s physical condition and body-contouring goals. Ensure the client is adequately hydrated. Advise clients to avoid heavy meals shortly before treatment. Remove metal jewelry and accessories from the treatment area. Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and cooling system. Position applicators only over suitable muscle groups. Secure all applicators before activating the system. Begin with a low HI-EMT and RF intensity. Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance. Monitor muscle response, skin warmth, and client comfort continuously. Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, or abnormal discomfort. Do not place applicators over the head, heart, chest, or injured tissue. Do not exceed the recommended treatment time. Allow appropriate recovery time between sessions. Clean and disinfect applicators after every client. Follow all cooling-system and maintenance requirements. Keep accurate client and treatment records when required. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Body-contouring centers Beauty salons Slimming clinics Medical spas where locally permitted Wellness centers Gyms and fitness studios Physiotherapy centers where locally permitted Professional muscle-conditioning providers Operators should complete appropriate training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments. Why Choose the Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine? 1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The system combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF tissue heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness in one treatment program. 2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four straight and curved applicators support customized positioning across the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline. 3. Multi-Area and Dual-Client Capability
The four-handle configuration supports efficient multi-area treatments and can accommodate dual-client workflows when permitted by the machine configuration and treatment protocol. 4. Intelligent Professional Operation
A 12-inch touchscreen, adjustable energy settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient operation in high-demand professional environments. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, after-sales technical support, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines HI-EMT muscle stimulation with radiofrequency heating. HI-EMT generates powerful muscle contractions, while RF energy heats the underlying tissue to support fat metabolism and skin firmness. Q: What is the difference between EMSlim RF and a standard electromagnetic machine?
A standard electromagnetic system primarily focuses on muscle stimulation. This system adds RF heating to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments alongside muscle conditioning. Q: How many applicators are included?
The machine includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options. Q: Why are straight and curved applicators provided?
Different applicator shapes help professionals position the handles over various muscle groups and natural body contours. Q: Can the machine treat two clients simultaneously?
The four-handle configuration can support two-client treatment workflows when permitted by the control configuration, professional protocol, and local operating requirements. Q: Can multiple body areas be treated during one appointment?
Yes. Compatible body areas may be treated simultaneously when supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, buttocks, thighs, and upper arms. Q: How long does one session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A standard starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions. Q: How frequently should sessions be scheduled?
Treatments are commonly scheduled approximately twice per week with suitable recovery time between sessions. Q: How many muscle contractions occur during a session?
The supplied product specification states that a 30-minute session can generate approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions. Q: Is the contraction count equal to completing 20,000–30,000 exercises?
The number is a product-performance comparison describing repeated muscle stimulation. It should not be interpreted as an exact replacement for conventional exercise. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally experience strong muscle contractions and warmth from the RF energy. Intensity should be increased gradually and adjusted according to individual comfort. Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to normal activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to the feeling after exercise may occur. Q: When can clients expect results?
Some clients may notice early changes after several sessions. Muscle definition, body contour, and skin firmness may continue developing during the weeks following a completed treatment course. Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 6–12 months with an appropriate lifestyle and maintenance plan. Individual result duration varies. Q: Are maintenance treatments recommended?
Periodic maintenance sessions may help support muscle tone and body-contouring results. Frequency should be determined according to the client’s response and goals. Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim RF treatments should complement regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, hydration, and a healthy lifestyle. Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional. Q: What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses air-and-water circulation cooling to support temperature management during professional operation. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, touchscreen operation, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add EMSlim RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine gives clinics, salons, gyms, wellness centers, and body-contouring professionals a versatile solution for muscle building, fat-reduction support, skin firming, and multi-area body sculpting. Five key benefits: Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology Four ergonomic straight and curved applicators Multi-area and dual-client treatment capability Intelligent 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
HI-EMT Intensity
Adjustable electromagnetic energy
Adapts muscle stimulation to the treatment area and client tolerance
RF Energy
Adjustable controlled heating
Supports fat metabolism and skin-firming treatments
Applicator Configuration
Four ergonomic handles
Enables flexible single-area, multi-area, or dual-client treatment
Applicator Shape
Straight and curved options
Supports secure positioning across different body contours
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Allows efficient professional treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Provides a structured program for progressive body-contouring results
Treatment Frequency
Approximately twice per week
Allows recovery time between muscle-stimulation sessions
Control Interface
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient program selection and energy adjustment
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports temperature control during continuous professional operation
Power Supply
110V/220V compatibility
Supports operation in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Muscle Toning
Abdomen
Stimulate the abdominal muscles and improve definition
Core Conditioning
Abdomen and core
Support muscle activation and core firmness
Waistline Contouring
Waist and sides
Improve the appearance of waistline shape
Buttock Toning
Buttocks
Stimulate gluteal muscles and support a firmer appearance
Thigh Sculpting
Inner and outer thighs
Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours
Arm Definition
Biceps and triceps
Support upper-arm conditioning and definition
Localized Fat Reduction
Compatible body areas
Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits
Skin-Firming Treatment
Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of skin firmness and texture
Multi-Area Sculpting
Compatible area combinations
Address more than one body zone within a treatment plan
Maintenance Treatment
Previously treated areas
Help maintain muscle tone and body-contouring results
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine
Technology
HI-EMT and radiofrequency heating
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Applicator Options
Straight and curved handles
Primary Functions
Muscle building, muscle toning, fat-reduction support, skin firming, and body contouring
Muscle Contractions
Approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal contractions per 30-minute session
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waistline, thighs, buttocks, and arms
Multi-Area Capability
Compatible body areas may be treated simultaneously
Dual-Client Capability
Supports two-client treatment workflows when permitted by the machine configuration and protocol
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Recommended Frequency
Approximately twice per week with suitable recovery intervals
Results Duration
Supplied estimate of 6–12 months with an appropriate lifestyle and maintenance
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display and Controls
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Energy Intensity
Adjustable according to the body area and client tolerance
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
Receives in 7 days.
From $2,699.00
Professional Muscle Sculpting and Body-Contouring System
Dual-Action Technology for Muscle Stimulation and Targeted Fat Reduction
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to combine intensive muscle stimulation with targeted fat-reduction treatments.
Advanced electrical muscle stimulation produces powerful involuntary muscle contractions, helping practitioners deliver muscle-conditioning and body-definition programs. Its integrated RF/energy technology simultaneously targets areas of localized fat, supporting a more toned and sculpted appearance.
With four specialized treatment applicators, adjustable frequency settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and pre-programmed protocols, the EMSZero provides customizable treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves.
2-in-1 muscle and fat treatment | Four applicators | 6000W power | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform Electrical Muscle Stimulation
Advanced EMS technology delivers controlled electrical energy to the targeted muscles, producing repeated involuntary contractions during the treatment. These contractions activate and engage the underlying muscles without requiring the client to perform conventional exercise during the session. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock toning and shaping Thigh muscle stimulation Arm definition programs Calf muscle conditioning General body-sculpting treatments Targeted RF/Energy Treatment
The integrated RF/energy function is designed to complement muscle stimulation by targeting areas where clients want to improve the appearance of localized fat and body contours. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Waistline shaping Thigh contouring Buttock definition Upper-arm shaping Targeted body-toning programs Simultaneous Muscle and Body-Contouring Treatment
EMSZero combines muscle stimulation and targeted fat-reduction energy in a single professional session. This enables practitioners to address both muscle tone and overall body shape using one system. The combined approach can be incorporated into personalized programs designed to support: Improved muscle definition A firmer-looking body contour Targeted body shaping Enhanced treatment efficiency Customized multi-area programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Conditioning Program
Designed to focus primarily on repeated muscle contractions and targeted muscle engagement. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock toning Arm muscle stimulation Thigh and calf conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved muscle definition Busy clients interested in assisted muscle stimulation Clients combining professional treatments with fitness programs Body-Contouring Program
Focuses on the appearance of localized fat and overall body shape in selected treatment areas. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Waistline shaping Thigh contouring Upper-arm shaping Recommended for: Clients with localized body-contouring concerns Clients seeking a firmer-looking silhouette Clients following a balanced wellness program Combined Muscle and Fat Program
Uses the machine’s dual-action functions to address muscle conditioning and body contouring during the same treatment program. Recommended applications: Abdominal sculpting Buttock shaping Thigh definition Arm contouring Full-body sculpting packages Recommended for: Clients seeking a comprehensive body-sculpting program Clients wanting to address muscle tone and body shape together Professional clinics offering premium combined treatments Maintenance Program
Designed to help clients maintain their body-contouring and muscle-conditioning programs after completing an initial treatment course. Recommended applications: Muscle-conditioning maintenance Body-contour maintenance Seasonal body-shaping programs Continued wellness support Recommended for: Returning body-contouring clients Clients who have completed six to eight sessions Clients combining treatment with exercise and healthy lifestyle habits Customizable Frequency and Treatment Settings The EMSZero system allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected body area, client comfort, and treatment objective. All settings should be selected according to professional consultation, client suitability, and individual tolerance. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waist
The applicators can be positioned over the abdominal area to support muscle conditioning, waistline definition, and a firmer-looking midsection. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Waistline shaping Core-area conditioning Improved abdominal definition Buttocks and Thighs
Treatments can be customized for the buttocks, inner thighs, outer thighs, and front or back of the legs. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock toning Thigh muscle conditioning Lower-body contouring Improved leg definition Arms and Calves
The specialized applicators can also be used for smaller muscle groups and targeted body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Biceps and triceps stimulation Calf muscle conditioning Targeted limb definition Professional Body-Contouring Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment goals, target areas, and potential contraindications. Explain the treatment experience and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the appropriate applicators and position them securely over the chosen treatment area. Placement should be adjusted according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objective. Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the treatment protocol, frequency, intensity, and session duration. Begin at a comfortable intensity and increase progressively according to client tolerance. Step 4: Active Treatment
The system delivers controlled muscle stimulation and the selected body-contouring energy for approximately 30 minutes. The client experiences strong, repeated muscle contractions during the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program automatically. The applicators are removed, and the practitioner provides any appropriate aftercare or treatment-plan recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The EMSZero 2-in-1 system combines versatile body-contouring functions with straightforward professional operation. Key advantages include: Two treatment functions on one platform Four specialized treatment applicators Adjustable 1–100Hz frequency range 6000W machine power Intelligent touchscreen controls Pre-programmed treatment protocols Automatic intensity control Temperature monitoring Automatic shut-off Universal 110V–240V power compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and technical support Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Body Sculpting Machine 4 × Specialized treatment applicators 1 × Intelligent touchscreen control system Integrated EMS muscle-stimulation function Integrated RF/energy body-contouring function Pre-programmed treatment protocols Adjustable 1–150Hz frequency controls 1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable Documentation and Training
English user manual Operating and safety guide Muscle-conditioning protocol guidance Body-contouring protocol guidance Combined-treatment protocol guidance Client consultation materials Treatment-plan templates Service-menu and package guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine includes professional operating guidance to help your team use the equipment confidently and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and program operation Client consultation and screening Correct applicator placement Frequency and intensity adjustment Muscle-conditioning protocols Combined body-contouring protocols Treatment safety and contraindications Routine cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty for dependable after-sales protection. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are provided for eligible warranty issues. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine must be operated according to the supplied manual and applicable local requirements. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active infection or inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery in the treatment area Serious muscle or neurological disorders Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning treatment. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 system is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Beauty salons Wellness centers Fitness and recovery studios Aesthetic practices Professional treatment facilities Operators should review local licensing, insurance, and treatment requirements before offering services. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1?
Two Functions on One Platform
The system combines muscle stimulation and targeted body-contouring energy, allowing practitioners to create more comprehensive treatment programs with one machine. Four Specialized Applicators
Four applicators support flexible placement across different body areas and allow clinics to design personalized treatments. Customizable Professional Settings
The adjustable 1–100Hz frequency range, intensity controls, and pre-programmed protocols support individualized muscle-conditioning and body-contouring sessions. Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can be used for the abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, and calves, expanding the range of services available to clients. Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine?
It is a professional body-contouring system that combines electrical muscle stimulation with targeted RF/energy technology to support muscle conditioning and body-shaping programs. How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment session takes approximately 30 minutes, depending on the target area and selected protocol. How many applicators are included?
The machine includes four specialized treatment applicators for different body areas and treatment objectives. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, buttocks, inner and outer thighs, upper arms, and calves. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends a course of six to eight sessions, generally scheduled once or twice per week. The final plan should be personalized following professional consultation. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. The intensity can be adjusted progressively according to individual tolerance and comfort. Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system does not require surgery, injections, incisions, or anesthesia. Can muscle stimulation and body contouring be performed together?
Yes. The dual-action system is designed to combine muscle stimulation and targeted body-contouring energy within one treatment program. Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. Practitioners can adjust the treatment intensity and frequency according to the selected body area, protocol, and client comfort. Can it be offered as a standalone service?
Yes. Clinics can offer EMSZero as a standalone body-sculpting treatment or combine it with compatible wellness and aesthetic services. Are results the same for every client?
No. Outcomes vary according to body composition, treatment consistency, lifestyle, selected settings, and individual response. Practitioners should provide realistic expectations during consultation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Operating guidance, treatment protocol instruction, safety training, and ongoing technical support are included. Add Professional Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine enables clinics, spas, and wellness centers to provide customizable muscle-conditioning and body-contouring services using one professional platform. Five key benefits: Dual-action muscle stimulation and body contouring Four specialized treatment applicators Multiple treatment areas and customizable protocols CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Machine Power
6000W
Professional system performance
Frequency Range
1–100Hz
Customizable muscle-stimulation programs
Treatment Applicators
Four
Multi-area body treatments
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Efficient clinic scheduling
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
One to two sessions weekly
Progressive treatment planning
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Protocol and intensity management
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Suitable Program
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Muscle or combined program
Waist
Improve the appearance of body contours
Body-contouring program
Buttocks
Toning, shaping, and muscle stimulation
Muscle or combined program
Thighs
Lower-body conditioning and contouring
Combined program
Upper Arms
Muscle stimulation and arm shaping
Muscle or combined program
Calves
Targeted muscle conditioning
Muscle-conditioning program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine
Technology
Electrical Muscle Stimulation and RF/energy body contouring
Machine Power
6000W
Frequency Range
1–100Hz adjustable
Treatment Applicators
Four specialized applicators
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Recommended Frequency
One to two sessions per week
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Pre-programmed and customizable protocols
Safety Features
Automatic intensity control, temperature monitoring, and automatic shut-off
Power Supply
110V–240V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
EMS, RF and Neo RF Body Sculpting in One System
The EMS Zero Ultra 6500W EMS RF Body Sculpting Machine combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation, radio-frequency energy, and Neo RF programs in one professional cosmetic system. It is designed for body-contouring, muscle-stimulation, and skin-firming applications on selected body areas.
Four ergonomic applicators, adjustable operating parameters, automatic and manual programs, and a large touchscreen allow operators to create a convenient treatment experience for different client requirements.
Product Highlights
- EMS electromagnetic muscle stimulation
- Radio-frequency technology
- Neo RF programs
- Up to 14 Tesla magnetic intensity
- 6500W rated power
- Four body applicators
- Multiple applicators can operate simultaneously
- Automatic and manual programs
- Large touchscreen control panel
- Adjustable treatment parameters
- Upgraded heat-dissipation system
- Mobile wheeled design
- AC 110V and 220V configurations
- Suitable for professional and personal cosmetic use
- 3-year warranty support
How the EMS Zero Ultra Works
The machine delivers electromagnetic energy through applicators placed over the selected body area. This energy stimulates repeated muscle contractions without requiring the user to perform each contraction voluntarily.
RF and Neo RF functions provide controlled heating during compatible programs. Combining muscle stimulation with RF energy allows the operator to offer a comprehensive cosmetic body-sculpting experience from one system.
Available intensity, time, and program settings can be adjusted through the touchscreen according to the treatment area, user comfort, and manufacturer instructions.
Three Technologies in One System
EMS Muscle Stimulation
The applicators deliver electromagnetic pulses that stimulate repeated contractions in the targeted muscles. This function is intended to support professional cosmetic muscle-conditioning and body-sculpting programs.
The operator should begin at a comfortable intensity and increase it gradually according to the user’s tolerance.
Radio-Frequency Technology
The integrated RF function delivers controlled thermal energy during compatible programs. It is intended to complement body-contouring and skin-firming cosmetic applications.
Settings must be selected according to the supplied operating instructions and individual user comfort.
Neo RF Programs
Neo RF provides additional operating options within the system. The available parameters allow trained operators to adapt each session to the selected area and intended cosmetic application.
The exact Neo RF settings and operating modes may depend on the ordered machine configuration.
Four Applicators for Efficient Operation
The EMS Zero Ultra is equipped with four ergonomic body applicators. Multiple applicators can be positioned over selected areas, helping operators create a convenient workflow during compatible programs.
Adjustable fastening straps hold the applicators securely in position. Integrated holders on both sides of the main unit provide organized storage between sessions.
Suitable Treatment Areas
According to the manufacturer’s documentation, the system can be used on areas including:
- Abdomen
- Arms
- Thighs
- Buttocks
Applicator position, intensity, and operating time should always follow the user manual and appropriate operator guidance.
Supports Professional Body-Contouring Programs
The EMS Zero Ultra can be incorporated into cosmetic programs focused on:
- Muscle stimulation
- Body contouring
- Body shaping
- Muscle conditioning
- Cosmetic skin firming
- Abdominal definition
- Buttocks conditioning
- Arm and thigh treatments
The machine does not guarantee a specific reduction in fat, increase in muscle, or other physical result. Outcomes and individual experiences may vary.
Large Touchscreen Control Panel
The integrated touchscreen gives operators convenient access to available programs, applicator controls, intensity levels, and operating settings.
The interface allows compatible applicators to be monitored and adjusted from one central screen. Automatic programs provide a simplified workflow, while manual controls allow more experienced operators to customize the available parameters.
Adjustable Automatic and Manual Programs
The EMS Zero Ultra supports both automatic and manual operation.
Automatic programs provide preset operating sequences for convenient everyday use. Manual mode allows trained operators to adjust the available parameters according to the selected area and individual comfort level.
Always begin at a low, comfortable intensity when working with a new user. Increase the intensity gradually rather than immediately selecting the maximum output.
Upgraded Heat-Dissipation System
Multiple ventilation areas are integrated into the machine to support heat dissipation during operation. The upgraded cooling design helps the system maintain consistent performance during regular studio use.
Air inlets and outlets must remain unobstructed. Leave sufficient open space around the unit and follow the ventilation and maintenance instructions in the user manual.
Mobile Professional Design
The EMS Zero Ultra features a modern upright cabinet with a stable wheeled base. It can be repositioned within a treatment room when necessary and secured in place during operation.
The organized applicator holders, large touchscreen, durable cabinet, and black-and-gold design create a premium appearance suitable for modern cosmetic environments.
Comfortable and Convenient Operation
A typical operating process includes:
- Position the machine in a stable and properly ventilated area.
- Select the appropriate applicators for the intended body area.
- Secure the applicators with the supplied straps.
- Choose an automatic or manual program.
- Begin with a comfortable intensity.
- Increase the intensity gradually according to tolerance.
- Monitor the user and machine throughout the session.
- Clean and store the applicators after use.
Program duration and settings should be selected according to the user manual instead of applying one fixed setting to every user.
Why Choose the EMS Zero Ultra?
- Combines EMS, RF, and Neo RF
- Up to 14 Tesla magnetic intensity
- 6500W rated power
- Four ergonomic applicators
- Simultaneous multi-applicator operation
- Automatic and manual programs
- Adjustable operating parameters
- Large touchscreen interface
- Upgraded heat-dissipation system
- Integrated applicator holders
- Mobile wheeled cabinet
- Suitable for several body areas
- CE and RoHS
- 3-year warranty support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | EMSZero Ultra |
| Product type | EMS and RF cosmetic body-sculpting machine |
| Technologies | EMS, RF and Neo RF |
| Rated power | 6500W |
| Maximum magnetic intensity | Up to 14 Tesla |
| Number of applicators | Four |
| Operating modes | Automatic and manual |
| Treatment type | Non-invasive cosmetic application |
| Treatment areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs and buttocks |
| Control system | Large touchscreen interface |
| Power supply | AC 110V or 220V |
| Installation | Mobile wheeled unit |
| Intended settings | Professional studios and personal cosmetic use |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS |
| Warranty | 3-year warranty support |
Specifications may vary slightly according to the selected configuration. Confirm the required voltage, plug type, applicators, and final specifications before ordering.
Suitable for Professional and Personal Settings
The EMS Zero Ultra may be suitable for:
- Beauty salons
- Cosmetic studios
- Body-contouring centers
- Spas and wellness centers
- Fitness and body-conditioning studios
- Qualified personal users
Commercial operators should complete suitable training, follow applicable local regulations, and screen each client before use.
Package Contents
- EMS Zero Ultra main unit
- Four EMS/RF body applicators
- Applicator fastening straps
- Applicator connection cables
- Power cable
- User manual
- Standard accessories for the selected configuration
The exact contents should be confirmed on the final quotation before placing an order.
Warranty and Support
WikBeauty provides 3-year warranty support in accordance with the applicable warranty conditions. Technical support is available for installation, operation, troubleshooting, and routine maintenance questions.
Important Safety Information
Do not use the EMS Zero Ultra during pregnancy or if the user has a pacemaker, implanted electronic device, or metal implant near the intended treatment area.
People with recent surgery, active infection, unexplained pain, impaired sensation, or a diagnosed health condition should consult a qualified healthcare professional before use.
This machine is intended for cosmetic body-sculpting and muscle-stimulation applications. It is not intended to diagnose, treat, cure, monitor, or prevent any disease or injury. Results vary between individuals.
Order the EMS Zero Ultra Body Sculpting Machine
Add EMS muscle stimulation, RF energy, and Neo RF programs to your cosmetic services with one professional platform. The EMS Zero Ultra provides four applicators, adjustable automatic and manual programs, up to 14 Tesla intensity, and a modern mobile design.
Select the required voltage and plug configuration and order your EMS Zero Ultra today.
Receives in 7 days.
$1,599.00
Professional Portable Electromagnetic Shockwave System
Wireless Technology for Qualified Medical and Men’s Health Practices
The ESWT PRO is a compact electromagnetic shockwave system developed for qualified healthcare professionals and specialized clinical environments.
A wireless treatment handpiece, 7-inch touchscreen, adjustable intensity and pre-programmed operating modes support flexible use in men’s health, rehabilitation and other applications permitted by the device’s certification and local regulations.
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is suitable for clinics requiring a compact platform that can be repositioned or transported between approved treatment locations.
Electromagnetic technology | Wireless handpiece | 4.5 kg system | Three-year warranty
Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
ESWT PRO generates shockwave pulses using an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor.
Key operating features include:
-
Adjustable intensity from levels 1–10
-
Selectable pulse frequency from 10–20 Hz
-
Wireless treatment handpiece
-
Precision applicator
-
Pre-programmed operating modes
-
Color touchscreen control
-
Rechargeable portable operation
Electromagnetic and pneumatic systems use different energy-generation mechanisms. One technology should not be described as universally safer, more effective or more comfortable without direct comparative evidence for the specific devices.
Portable Wireless Design
The ESWT PRO platform is designed for professional mobility within appropriate clinical environments.
Lightweight System
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is easier to transport and reposition than many full-size shockwave platforms.
Wireless Handpiece
The rechargeable handpiece reduces cable restrictions during operation and can be returned to the supplied charging dock between treatments.
Extended Battery Operation
The supplied specification lists more than 10 hours of operation per full charge. Actual battery life may vary according to intensity, frequency, treatment duration and battery condition.
Compact Desktop Footprint
The system measures approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm with its dock, allowing installation in treatment rooms where space is limited.
Portable design does not automatically authorize house calls or mobile medical treatment. Operators remain responsible for maintaining privacy, hygiene, documentation, electrical safety and local healthcare compliance.
Potential Professional Applications
Depending on the device’s registered indications and applicable local regulations, shockwave technology may be evaluated for use within professional programs concerning:
-
Selected cases of vasculogenic erectile dysfunction
-
Men’s sexual-health assessment programs
-
Rehabilitation applications
-
Musculoskeletal treatment protocols
-
Other manufacturer-authorized professional uses
Low-intensity shockwave therapy should not be advertised as suitable for every cause or severity of erectile dysfunction.
ED may have vascular, neurological, hormonal, medication-related, psychological or mixed causes. Proper medical assessment is required before determining whether shockwave treatment is appropriate.
Evidence-Informed Positioning for Erectile Dysfunction Published research suggests that low-intensity shockwave therapy may produce a modest improvement in erectile-function scores in some men with vasculogenic ED. However: Results are not consistent across all studies Device technologies and energy outputs vary Treatment protocols are not fully standardized Not every ED cause is vascular Benefits may diminish over time No result can be guaranteed Regulatory status differs between countries Clinical Use Requires Proper Patient Selection Appropriate patient assessment should include: Complete medical history Sexual history Medication review Cardiovascular-risk assessment Identification of possible vascular, hormonal or neurological causes Review of previous ED treatments Physical examination where clinically indicated Validated erectile-function questionnaire where appropriate Discussion of available treatment alternatives Informed consent Only a qualified healthcare professional should diagnose erectile dysfunction or decide whether shockwave therapy is appropriate. Important Limitations of Use
ESWT PRO should not be promoted for: Guaranteed treatment of all ED severity levels Permanent restoration of erectile function Premature-ejaculation treatment without supporting indication Dissolution of Peyronie’s plaque Correction of penile curvature Guaranteed recovery following prostate surgery Replacement of prescribed medication Unsupervised home use Sexual-performance enhancement in clients without medical assessment For Peyronie’s disease, shockwave therapy may be considered for pain in some circumstances, but it should not be marketed as reducing plaque size or correcting curvature. Professional Treatment Workflow 1. Medical Assessment
A qualified professional reviews the patient’s medical and sexual history, cardiovascular status, medications, previous treatments and possible contraindications. 2. Treatment Planning
The clinician determines whether shockwave therapy is appropriate and selects a protocol consistent with the device instructions and applicable clinical guidance. 3. System Preparation
The wireless handpiece is checked, the applicator is prepared and the treatment area is positioned according to the approved protocol. 4. Parameter Selection
Intensity, frequency, pulse count and treatment locations are selected by the qualified operator. 5. Controlled Treatment
Shockwave pulses are delivered while the operator monitors patient comfort and tissue response. 6. Post-Treatment Review
The patient receives appropriate guidance, and the treatment parameters and any adverse responses are documented. 7. Follow-Up Assessment
Progress should be evaluated using an appropriate clinical method rather than relying only on subjective marketing claims. Treatment Protocols The appropriate protocol depends on: Confirmed diagnosis Device energy characteristics Energy flux density Pulse count Pulse frequency Treatment locations Patient response Clinical guidance Local regulatory requirements The supplied specifications mention pre-programmed ED modes and typical sessions of approximately 12–15 minutes. These settings should not be represented as universal clinical protocols. A fixed course of 12–16 treatments, monthly maintenance or permanent maintenance benefits should not be promised without evidence for the specific device and patient. Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Main Equipment
One ESWT PRO control system One wireless treatment handpiece One precision applicator One desktop charging dock Power supply suitable for the selected market Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate Applicable ISO documentation Installation and setup guidance Operating instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Technical-support information Professional Training
Equipment setup training Touchscreen and handpiece operation Intensity and frequency adjustment Patient-screening guidance Contraindication review Treatment documentation Cleaning and infection-control guidance Basic troubleshooting Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE-Certified Professional System
The ESWT PRO comes with: CE Certificate Applicable ISO Documentation The equipment must be used only for the indications and within the jurisdictions covered by its applicable certification and registration. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: System installation Wireless handpiece charging Touchscreen navigation Applicator preparation Intensity and frequency controls Pre-programmed modes Patient-screening principles Basic operating procedures Cleaning and maintenance Troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not qualify an unlicensed person to diagnose or treat erectile dysfunction. Medical training, professional licensing and local authorization remain the operator’s responsibility. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The ESWT PRO is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original wireless handpiece Charging dock Power-supply components Other eligible original parts Battery cells, applicators and other consumable or limited-life components may have separate coverage conditions. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect charging or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping the handpiece Normal battery degradation Normal applicator wear Unauthorized transportation damage Use outside the supplied instructions All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Contraindications and Clinical Precautions This is professional equipment. Screening must be performed by a qualified healthcare professional. Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment in patients with: Active infection or inflammation in the treatment area Open wounds or significant skin injury Active malignancy in or near the treatment area Significant bleeding disorders Anticoagulant use Recent surgery in the treatment area Implanted devices affected by electromagnetic equipment Severe uncontrolled cardiovascular disease Untreated hypertension Significant neurological impairment affecting sensation Other contraindications identified in the user manual Penile implants, recent pelvic procedures and complex urological conditions require specialist evaluation. This is not an exhaustive list. The operator must follow the device manual, applicable medical guidance and local regulations. Intended Professional Users
ESWT PRO is intended for appropriately qualified professionals working in settings such as: Urology practices Sexual-medicine clinics Men’s health centers Licensed medical clinics Rehabilitation practices where the device is appropriately registered Qualified multidisciplinary healthcare centers The device is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose ESWT PRO?
Electromagnetic Energy Generation
The system uses an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor. Wireless Handpiece
Rechargeable wireless operation supports flexible positioning during professional use. Compact 4.5 kg Design
The lightweight system is easier to transport and install than many full-size shockwave platforms. Adjustable Operation
Ten intensity levels and selectable 10–20 Hz frequency support protocol customization by qualified operators. Touchscreen Interface
A 7-inch color display provides access to controls and pre-programmed modes. Professional Training
Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance. Frequently Asked Questions
What is electromagnetic shockwave therapy?
It is a method of generating shockwave pulses through an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor. Treatment characteristics depend on the device’s energy output, applicator and settings. Is it appropriate for every type of ED?
No. ED has vascular, neurological, hormonal, psychological, medication-related and mixed causes. Medical assessment is necessary before treatment. Is the treatment completely painless?
Patient experience varies. Adjustable intensity may help manage comfort, but pressure, vibration, sensitivity or discomfort may occur. How many sessions are required?
There is no universal protocol suitable for every device or patient. Session number and frequency must be selected by a qualified clinician. Can this machine be used for home visits?
Portable design may support professional mobility where legally permitted. The operator must maintain clinical privacy, sanitation, documentation and regulatory compliance. Is the device approved for ED treatment in every country?
No. Regulatory status and permitted indications vary by jurisdiction. The device must only be marketed and used within the indications covered by its applicable registration. Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This training does not replace professional medical qualifications. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved parts. Consumables, normal battery wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. What certifications are included?
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. Add Portable Shockwave Technology to Your Practice
ESWT PRO combines: Electromagnetic shockwave generation Wireless handpiece operation Ten adjustable intensity levels A compact 4.5 kg design A seven-inch touchscreen interface Available exclusively for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Specification
Details
Product name
ESWT PRO
Product type
Portable professional shockwave system
Energy-generation method
Electromagnetic
Adjustable intensity
Levels 1–10
Pulse frequency
10–20 Hz
Treatment handpiece
Wireless rechargeable handpiece
User interface
7-inch color touchscreen
Pre-programmed modes
Five ED-focused operating programs
Typical session duration
Approximately 12–15 minutes, protocol dependent
Listed battery operation
More than 10 hours per charge
Charging system
Desktop charging dock
System weight
Approximately 4.5 kg
Dimensions with dock
Approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Technical support
Lifetime remote support
Certification
CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation
Receives in 7 days.
$399.00
Professional Four-in-One Electrotherapy and Physiotherapy System
Four Treatment Functions for Body Contouring, Muscle Stimulation and Wellness
The WikBeauty 4-in-1 Fat Burning, Muscle Building, Breast Enhancement and Physiotherapy Machine is a multifunctional electrotherapy platform developed for slimming clinics, physiotherapy centers, beauty salons and professional wellness facilities.
The system provides four selectable treatment functions for body-contouring support, muscle stimulation, breast-area firming and physiotherapy-oriented wellness programs.
Its adjustable 1–10MHz frequency range, maximum 500W output, intelligent power control, cooling system and 10–12-inch touchscreen support customized treatments for different body areas and professional objectives.
Four treatment functions | 1–10MHz adjustable frequency | 500W maximum power | Three-year warranty
Four Treatment Functions on One Professional Platform Body-Contouring Support
The body-contouring function uses adjustable electrotherapy stimulation for professional programs targeting suitable body areas. Common treatment applications include: Abdomen treatments Waist-contouring programs Upper-arm treatments Thigh treatments Buttock treatments General body-sculpting services Muscle Stimulation
The muscle-stimulation function applies controlled electrical impulses to suitable muscle groups. Common treatment applications include: Muscle-activation programs Muscle-toning support Abdomen and core treatments Upper-arm conditioning Thigh and gluteal programs Fitness-oriented services Breast-Area Firming
The breast-area function is intended for appropriate professional firming and appearance-enhancement protocols. Common treatment applications include: Breast-area firming support Upper-chest toning programs Appearance-focused treatments Tissue-stimulation protocols Beauty-care services Customized professional programs This function should not be represented as producing permanent breast enlargement or replacing surgical breast procedures. Physiotherapy and Recovery
The physiotherapy function supports professionally planned muscle-relaxation, recovery and circulation-focused programs. Common treatment applications include: Post-workout recovery Tired-muscle relaxation Muscle-stimulation programs Circulation-focused wellness General physiotherapy support Maintenance-oriented recovery sessions The appropriate function, applicator, frequency, intensity and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Function for Each Client
The system supports four independent treatment functions. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and contraindication assessment. Function 1: Body Contouring
A body-focused program for suitable areas requiring contour-refinement and skin-firming support. Recommended applications: Abdomen Waistline Upper arms Thighs Recommended for: Slimming clinics Body-contouring studios Beauty salons Clients seeking non-surgical body-care services Function 2: Muscle Stimulation
A fitness-oriented program for suitable muscle groups. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscles Upper arms Thighs Gluteal muscles Recommended for: Fitness and wellness centers Muscle-toning programs Post-weight-management clients Professional body-conditioning services Function 3: Breast-Area Firming
An appearance-focused program for appropriate breast and upper-chest areas. Recommended applications: Breast-area firming Upper-chest muscle stimulation Appearance-enhancement programs Customized beauty treatments Recommended for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Professional firming services Appropriately assessed clients Function 4: Physiotherapy and Recovery
A recovery-oriented program for suitable muscles and body areas. Recommended applications: Post-workout recovery Muscle-relaxation programs Circulation support General physiotherapy services Recommended for: Physiotherapy centers Wellness clinics Fitness facilities Recovery-oriented businesses Adjustable Frequency for Customized Electrotherapy
The system provides an adjustable frequency range from 1MHz to 10MHz together with intelligent power control. The adjustable controls give trained operators greater flexibility over treatment intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with lower settings before frequency or intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The multifunctional applicators support professional treatment of several body areas. Upper-Body Treatments
Upper arms Suitable chest areas Upper back Waist Other professionally assessed areas Core and Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Waistline Thighs Buttocks Suitable leg areas Recovery and Wellness Treatments
Suitable muscle groups Post-workout areas Tired muscles Body-conditioning programs General physiotherapy applications Maintenance-oriented wellness sessions Professional Body and Wellness Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected function, applicator, frequency, intensity and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, treatment objectives, selected body areas and contraindications. The appropriate treatment function is then selected. 2. Applicator Preparation
The required treatment areas are prepared according to the operating protocol. The appropriate applicators are installed and positioned correctly. 3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the treatment function, frequency, intensity, session duration and other available settings according to client tolerance and professional protocol. 4. Electrotherapy Treatment
The machine delivers controlled electrotherapy stimulation through the selected applicators. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes per treatment area. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the applicators are removed and the treatment areas are inspected. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary tingling, warmth, redness, muscle fatigue or soreness may occur following treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines four selectable functions with intelligent touchscreen controls for efficient professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Four independent treatment functions Adjustable 1–10MHz frequency range Maximum 500W power output 10–12-inch touchscreen Intelligent power control Integrated cooling system Multifunctional applicator handles 110V and 220V compatibility Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, multifunctional applicators and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 4-in-1 Electrotherapy Machine Multifunctional treatment applicators Applicator-connection components Required positioning accessories Power cable English user manual Training guide Warranty card Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Applicator setup instructions Treatment-function selection Frequency and intensity guidance Body-area positioning information Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Applicator installation Treatment-function selection Frequency adjustment Intensity selection Body-area positioning Client-comfort monitoring Basic treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty 4-in-1 Electrotherapy Machine is supported by a three-year warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Intelligent power-control system Integrated cooling system Original treatment applicators Applicator-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement components Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect applicator placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of applicators and external components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional electrotherapy equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Severe cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy Active or suspected blood clots Open wounds or active infections Severe skin conditions in the treatment area Recent surgery Acute inflammation Severe nerve disorders or reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Electrical stimulation must not be applied across the chest, through the head, over the front or side of the neck, directly over the heart, or over implanted electronic devices. Breast-area applications require careful professional assessment and must not place electrical current across the chest or heart. The selected frequency and intensity must remain comfortable throughout treatment. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Slimming clinics Physiotherapy centers Beauty salons Wellness clinics Aesthetic centers Body-contouring studios Fitness and recovery facilities Trained independent practitioners Qualified healthcare professionals This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the WikBeauty Four-in-One Electrotherapy System? Access Four Treatment Functions
One professional platform supports body-contouring, muscle-stimulation, breast-area firming and physiotherapy-oriented programs. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The multifunctional applicators support professional protocols for the abdomen, waist, upper arms, thighs, buttocks and suitable muscle groups. Customize Every Session
Adjustable frequency, intensity and treatment modes allow sessions to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The system allows clinics to create body-contouring packages, muscle-stimulation programs, firming services and recovery-oriented treatments. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and after-sales support. Frequently Asked Questions
What are the four treatment functions?
The system provides selectable functions for body-contouring support, muscle stimulation, breast-area firming and physiotherapy-oriented wellness programs. How does the muscle-stimulation function work?
The system applies controlled electrical stimulation to suitable muscle groups. Frequency and intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client tolerance. Can the machine permanently enlarge breasts?
No permanent breast enlargement should be guaranteed. The breast-area mode is intended for appropriate professional firming and appearance-enhancement programs. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, upper arms, thighs, buttocks, appropriate breast and upper-chest areas, and professionally assessed muscle groups. How long does a session take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes per treatment area. The exact duration depends on the selected function and professional protocol. How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional course may include approximately 2–3 sessions per week for 4–6 weeks. The final schedule depends on the client’s condition, objectives and response. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients may feel tingling, warmth or muscle stimulation. Intensity should be adjusted to remain comfortable, and treatment should be stopped if pain occurs. Can the machine replace regular exercise?
No. Electrotherapy may complement professionally planned fitness and wellness routines, but it does not replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition or healthy lifestyle habits. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, tingling, fatigue or muscle soreness may occur. Is professional training included?
Professional equipment training covers machine setup, applicator positioning, function selection, frequency and intensity adjustment, treatment protocols, cleaning and safety. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Multifunctional Electrotherapy to Your Business
The WikBeauty 4-in-1 Electrotherapy Machine combines: Four independent treatment functions Adjustable 1–10MHz frequency A 10–12-inch touchscreen Professional body and wellness applications Three-year warranty and professional training Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment functions, applicators and professional training. Order Your Four-in-One Electrotherapy Machine and Request Pricing
Treatment Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Setting
First-time clients and comfort-focused treatments
Moderate Setting
General body-contouring and muscle-stimulation programs
Higher Setting
Appropriately selected professional protocols
Customized Setting
Treatment-specific frequency and intensity selection
Treatment Area
Applicable Function
Intended Aesthetic or Wellness Application
Abdomen
Body contouring or muscle stimulation
Core and body-contour support
Waistline
Body contouring
Waist-contour refinement
Upper arms
Body contouring or muscle stimulation
Arm-toning support
Thighs
Body contouring or muscle stimulation
Lower-body conditioning
Buttocks
Muscle stimulation
Gluteal-toning support
Breast and upper chest
Breast-area firming
Appearance and firming support
Post-workout muscles
Physiotherapy
Recovery-oriented wellness
Suitable body areas
Customized function
Professional electrotherapy programs
Specification
Details
Product Name
WikBeauty 4-in-1 Electrotherapy Machine
Product Type
Professional multifunctional electrotherapy and physiotherapy system
Technology
Electrotherapy and physiotherapy stimulation
Number of Functions
Four independent treatment modes
Functions
Body contouring, muscle stimulation, breast-area firming and physiotherapy
Frequency Range
1–10MHz adjustable
Maximum Power
500W
Display
10–12-inch touchscreen
Applicators
Multifunctional treatment handles
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, buttocks, breast area and suitable muscle groups
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes per area
Suggested Course
Approximately 2–3 sessions per week for 4–6 weeks
Safety System
Intelligent power control and cooling system
Voltage Options
110V and 220V
Warranty
Three-year warranty
Training
Professional equipment training
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
$2,599.00
Professional Fibroblast Plasma Pen System
Precision Plasma Technology for Skin Tightening and Rejuvenation
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen is a professional aesthetic device developed for beauty clinics, medical spas, professional skin-care studios and qualified aesthetic practitioners.
The pen produces a controlled electrical arc between the device tip and the skin’s surface. This creates a localized thermal effect that supports professional skin-tightening, texture-refinement and rejuvenation protocols.
Its compact pen design allows trained practitioners to work precisely on selected facial and body areas according to the client’s skin condition and professional treatment plan.
Precision plasma arc | Targeted skin treatments | Professional operation | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Plasma Platform Fine-Line and Wrinkle Treatments
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports professionally planned treatments for the appearance of suitable facial lines and wrinkles. Common applications include: Forehead-line appearance Suitable eye-area lines Crow’s-feet appearance Upper-lip lines Lower-face lines General anti-aging protocols Skin-Tightening Programs
The controlled plasma arc creates localized thermal effects on selected skin areas. Common applications include: Loose-looking facial skin Jawline skin tightening Suitable neck areas Forehead treatments Lower-face rejuvenation Professional firming programs Scar and Texture Refinement
The plasma pen can be incorporated into professional protocols intended to improve the appearance of selected scars and uneven-looking texture. Common applications include: Acne-scar appearance Suitable surgical scars Uneven-looking skin texture Localized skin imperfections Surface texture refinement Professional skin-renewal treatments Eye-Area Rejuvenation
The precision tip allows trained practitioners to work on appropriate areas surrounding the eyes. Common applications include: Upper-eye-area skin Lower-eye-area skin Crow’s-feet appearance Fine lines around the eyes Suitable brow-area treatments Professional eye-contour protocols Plasma energy must never be applied directly to the eye, eyeball, wet eyelid margin or other prohibited anatomical structures. The appropriate intensity, treatment pattern, point spacing and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin type, treatment area and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports customized protocols for different professional aesthetic objectives. Program 1: Fine Lines and Wrinkles
A precision-focused program for suitable facial lines and small treatment areas. Recommended applications: Forehead lines Crow’s-feet appearance Upper-lip lines Lower-face wrinkles Recommended for: Anti-aging clinics Professional skin-care studios Medical spas Clients seeking targeted rejuvenation Program 2: Facial Skin Tightening
A customized program for suitable areas of loose-looking facial skin. Recommended applications: Lower-face tightening Jawline skin Forehead areas Suitable neck areas Recommended for: Facial-rejuvenation services Professional firming programs Mature-looking skin Clients seeking non-surgical skin treatments Program 3: Scar-Appearance and Texture Care
A skin-renewal program for appropriately selected scars and uneven-looking texture. Recommended applications: Acne-scar appearance Suitable surgical scars Localized texture concerns Selected skin imperfections Recommended for: Professional scar-care protocols Texture-refinement treatments Skin-renewal programs Appropriately assessed clients Program 4: Eye-Contour Rejuvenation
A precision program for suitable skin around the eye area. Recommended applications: Upper-eye-area skin Lower-eye-area skin Crow’s-feet appearance Brow-area skin Recommended for: Eye-contour services Mature-looking eye areas Precision facial treatments Trained professional practitioners Precision Plasma Application for Customized Treatments
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen creates a controlled electrical arc that produces localized thermal effects at the skin’s surface. The practitioner must maintain appropriate spacing between plasma points and avoid overtreating the same area. New clients and sensitive treatment zones should begin with conservative parameters. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The precision pen supports professional treatments on selected facial and body areas. Facial Treatments
Forehead Cheeks Upper-lip area Lower face Jawline Other professionally assessed facial zones Eye-Contour Treatments Suitable upper-eye-area skin Suitable lower-eye-area skin Crow’s-feet area Brow-area skin Other approved surrounding zones Neck and Body Treatments
Suitable neck areas Décolletage Hands Localized scars Selected texture concerns Other professionally assessed skin areas Professional Skin-Rejuvenation Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected area, skin type, plasma intensity, application pattern and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, healing response, tendency toward pigmentation or scarring and contraindications. 2. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and prepared according to the professional protocol. An appropriate topical anesthetic may be used where permitted and clinically suitable. 3. Parameter and Pattern Selection
The practitioner selects an appropriate plasma intensity, point spacing, treatment pattern and session duration according to the client’s skin and treatment area. 4. Plasma Treatment
The pen is held at the required distance to create controlled plasma arcs across the selected treatment zone. The practitioner works precisely and avoids excessive overlapping. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the area is assessed and appropriate aftercare instructions are provided. A typical session may last approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the size and number of treatment areas. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, crusting and visible treatment points are expected during healing. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The compact Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports precise operation in qualified professional aesthetic settings. Key operating advantages include: Controlled plasma-arc technology Precision pen-style applicator Targeted facial and body treatments Adjustable professional parameters Compact and portable design Multiple treatment-tip compatibility Localized treatment control Professional skin-rejuvenation applications Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the plasma pen and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Fibroblast Plasma Pen Professional plasma treatment tips Tip-installation components Power adapter or charging equipment for the selected model Power cable where applicable Protective storage packaging English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Professional setup guidance Treatment-tip installation Intensity-selection guidance Treatment-pattern guidance Point-spacing instructions Facial and body treatment guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional operating guidance covers: Device setup Treatment-tip installation Intensity selection Plasma-arc control Treatment-point spacing Facial-area mapping Eye-contour precautions Skin-type assessment Client consultation Contraindication screening Post-treatment care Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting The operator must also meet all professional training, qualification and licensing requirements applicable in the intended market. Three-Year Warranty
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main plasma pen unit Internal electronic components Plasma-generation components Intensity-control system Original charging or power components Other eligible components supplied with the device Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Setup guidance for eligible replacement components Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-tip installation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or power connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of treatment tips and consumables Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, device serial information, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen intentionally creates controlled thermal injury at the skin’s surface. It is a professional treatment device and should only be operated by appropriately trained and legally authorized practitioners. A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active cancer Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory skin conditions Recent surgery Recent laser treatments or chemical peels Recent isotretinoin use Bleeding disorders Poor wound healing A history of abnormal or keloid scarring Higher risk of post-inflammatory pigmentation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Possible treatment responses and complications include: Redness Swelling Tenderness Crusting Temporary treatment marks Pigmentation changes Infection Delayed healing Burns Scarring Plasma energy must never be applied directly to the eyes, wet eyelid margin, mucous membranes or other prohibited anatomical areas. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Professional aesthetic clinics Medical spas Qualified skin-care studios Trained plasma practitioners Appropriate healthcare professionals Professional anti-aging centers Clinics offering targeted skin treatments Businesses expanding their advanced aesthetic services This device is not intended for casual, untrained or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Fibroblast Plasma Pen? Provide Precision Treatments
The compact pen and controlled plasma arc allow trained practitioners to work on localized wrinkles, scars and skin-texture concerns. Treat Multiple Skin Areas
The system supports professional protocols for selected areas of the face, eye contour, jawline, neck, hands and body. Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity, treatment-point spacing and application patterns allow treatments to be adapted to the client’s skin and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The device can support professional fine-line, skin-tightening, scar-appearance, eye-contour and texture-refinement services. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year limited warranty, professional operating guidance and technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is a Fibroblast Plasma Pen?
A Fibroblast Plasma Pen creates a controlled electrical arc between the device tip and the skin’s surface. This produces localized thermal effects used in professional aesthetic skin treatments. How does plasma treatment support skin tightening?
The controlled thermal treatment creates localized skin contraction and initiates a healing response. The appearance of the treated area may continue changing during recovery and remodeling. Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas may include the forehead, cheeks, upper-lip area, eye contour, lower face, jawline, neck, hands and selected scars. How long does a session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. The exact duration depends on the size and number of treatment areas. Is plasma pen treatment painless?
No. The procedure can cause heat, stinging or discomfort. An appropriate topical anesthetic may be used by a qualified professional where permitted. Is there downtime?
Yes. Redness, swelling, tenderness, crusting and visible treatment points may occur. Recovery time varies according to treatment intensity, area and individual healing response. When may clients notice results?
Some contraction may be visible after treatment, while additional changes may develop during healing. Outcomes and timelines vary between clients. Are results permanent?
No permanent result should be guaranteed. The natural aging process continues, and maintenance or additional treatment may be required. Can the device be used on every skin type?
No. Some skin types have a higher risk of pigmentation changes or scarring. Every client requires careful professional skin assessment before treatment. Can the Plasma Pen be used at home?
No. Plasma treatment creates controlled thermal injury and should only be performed by an appropriately trained and legally authorized professional. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved device components, subject to the official warranty policy. Treatment tips, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add Precision Plasma Treatments to Your Professional Services
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen combines: Controlled plasma-arc technology Precision point-by-point application Professional facial and body protocols Targeted skin-tightening and texture-refinement services Three-year limited warranty and technical support Contact Wikbeauty to order the Fibroblast Plasma Pen or receive more information about its professional operation and package contents. Order Your Fibroblast Plasma Pen and Request Pricing
Treatment Approach
Recommended Application
Lower-Intensity Application
Small areas, initial protocols and suitable delicate zones
Moderate Application
General professional skin-tightening treatments
Targeted Point Pattern
Localized wrinkles, scars and texture concerns
Customized Treatment Pattern
Area-specific protocols based on professional assessment
Skin Concern
Applicable Treatment
Intended Aesthetic Application
Fine-line appearance
Precision plasma pattern
Targeted facial rejuvenation
Forehead wrinkles
Customized point application
Wrinkle-appearance improvement
Crow’s-feet appearance
Conservative eye-area protocol
Eye-contour rejuvenation
Loose-looking facial skin
Skin-tightening pattern
Firming and contour support
Jawline skin
Targeted plasma treatment
Lower-face rejuvenation
Scar appearance
Localized treatment pattern
Texture-refinement support
Uneven-looking texture
Customized plasma application
Skin-renewal program
Aging-looking hands
Professional hand protocol
Texture and rejuvenation support
Specification
Details
Product Name
Fibroblast Plasma Pen
Product Type
Professional plasma skin-treatment device
Technology
Controlled electrical plasma arc
Primary Applications
Skin tightening, fine-line care, scar-appearance and texture-refinement treatments
Treatment Areas
Selected areas of the face, eye contour, jawline, neck, hands and body
Treatment Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Operation
Precision point-by-point plasma application
Intensity
Adjustable according to the selected device configuration
Treatment Tips
Interchangeable professional plasma tips
Design
Compact handheld pen
Intended Users
Appropriately trained professional operators
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Support
Professional operating guidance and technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$550.00
Professional Far-Infrared Heat Therapy System
Adjustable Full-Body Heating for Home Wellness and Professional Spa Treatments
The WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket is a portable far-infrared heat therapy system developed for home wellness users, beauty salons, spas, recovery centers and wellness professionals.
Its dense internal heating-wire design provides consistent heat distribution across the blanket. Adjustable temperature controls allow the system to heat rapidly up to 80°C, supporting personalized relaxation, sweating and recovery-oriented sessions.
The foldable design provides full-body coverage while remaining convenient to operate, store and transport.
Far-infrared heating | Adjustable temperature | Full-body coverage | Three-year warranty
Four Wellness Applications on One Far-Infrared Platform Relaxation and Stress Relief
The far-infrared heating system surrounds the body with adjustable warmth, creating a comfortable environment for relaxation and stress reduction. Common applications include: Relaxation sessions Stress-management programs Evening wellness routines Spa relaxation packages Self-care programs General home wellness Natural Sweating
The adjustable heat supports the body’s natural sweating response during a controlled session. Common applications include: Sweat-focused wellness sessions General body-care programs Spa wellness packages Post-workout relaxation Personal wellness routines Maintenance-oriented treatments Circulation and Recovery Support
Far-infrared warmth may support circulation and help relax tired or tense muscles. Common applications include: Post-workout recovery Tired-muscle relaxation General circulation support Body-warming programs Fatigue-relief sessions Fitness and recovery services Body and Skin Wellness
The combination of warmth, sweating and relaxation can be incorporated into broader body-care and skin-wellness programs. Common applications include: Body-wellness packages Skin-care preparation Body-contouring add-on services Cellulite-appearance programs Wellness memberships Personal self-care routines The appropriate temperature and session duration should be selected according to the user’s comfort, experience and wellness objectives. Select the Right Treatment Program
The sauna blanket supports adjustable temperature and duration settings for different wellness objectives. Program 1: Gentle Relaxation
A lower-temperature program designed for first-time users and comfort-focused wellness sessions. Recommended applications: General relaxation Evening wellness routines First-time heat sessions Stress-reduction programs Recommended for: New users Home wellness routines Spa relaxation services Clients who prefer gentle warmth Program 2: Sweat and Wellness
A moderate-temperature program designed to encourage natural sweating and full-body warmth. Recommended applications: Sweat-focused sessions General wellness programs Body-care packages Personal self-care routines Recommended for: Wellness centers Beauty salons Spa treatment packages Regular home users Program 3: Recovery and Relaxation
A customizable heat program intended for post-workout relaxation and tired-muscle support. Recommended applications: Post-workout sessions Tired-muscle relaxation Fatigue-relief programs General recovery support Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Recovery centers Personal trainers Sports-wellness businesses Program 4: Professional Wellness Add-On
A full-body heating program that can be added to suitable spa, massage and body-care services. Recommended applications: Massage packages Body-care programs Spa memberships Wellness-treatment combinations Recommended for: Beauty salons Professional spas Wellness centers Businesses expanding their treatment menu Adjustable Heat for Customized Wellness Sessions
The Infrared Sauna Blanket provides adjustable temperature and treatment duration. Each setting should be selected according to user comfort, heat tolerance and wellness objectives. The adjustable settings give users greater control over temperature, session intensity and comfort. New users should begin with a lower temperature and shorter duration before increasing either setting gradually. Adjustable Treatment Coverage
The blanket provides full-body heating coverage for a comprehensive wellness experience. Upper-Body Coverage
Back Shoulders Arms Torso Stomach Lower-Body Coverage
Hips Buttocks Thighs Lower legs Feet Full-Body Sessions
Relaxation Natural sweating Recovery support General body wellness Home and professional spa programs Professional and Home Wellness Applications The available sessions depend on the selected temperature, duration and wellness objective. User suitability and individual responses vary. Health conditions and heat sensitivity should be considered before every session. How a Wellness Session Works 1. User Preparation
The user reviews the operating instructions, confirms suitability and selects a comfortable treatment area. Water should be available before, during and after the session. 2. Blanket Preparation
The sauna blanket is placed on a flat, heat-resistant surface. The digital controller and power cable are connected according to the operating manual. 3. Temperature Selection
The user selects an appropriate temperature and session duration. First-time users should begin with a lower temperature and shorter session. 4. Heat Therapy Session
The user lies comfortably inside the blanket while the dense heating-wire system distributes far-infrared warmth across the body. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. 5. Post-Session Care
After the session, the user exits the blanket carefully, allows the body to cool gradually and drinks water to support hydration. The blanket should be switched off, disconnected and cleaned according to the supplied maintenance instructions. Designed for Home and Professional Wellness Environments
The Infrared Sauna Blanket combines adjustable far-infrared heating with a foldable, portable design for convenient use. Key operating advantages include: Far-infrared heating technology Dense internal heating-wire distribution Rapid heating up to 80°C Adjustable temperature settings Digital temperature display Wired and remote-control options Full-body heat coverage Foldable design for convenient storage Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the sauna blanket, temperature-control equipment and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket One digital temperature controller Remote-control components Power cable for the selected voltage Required connection components English instruction manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Product setup guidance Temperature-control instructions Session-duration guidance Home and professional-use instructions Safety and contraindication information Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Professional Guidance and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand: Product setup Digital-controller operation Temperature adjustment Session-duration selection Safe blanket positioning Home and professional-use protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety precautions Storage instructions Basic troubleshooting Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket is supported by a three-year warranty, providing long-term protection for your wellness-equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Infrared sauna blanket Internal heating components Digital temperature controller Original remote-control components Power connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the product Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Setup guidance for eligible replacement components Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Folding or storing the blanket incorrectly Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of fabric and external materials Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, product serial information, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This sauna blanket produces high temperatures and should only be used according to the supplied operating instructions. Users should review their health condition and heat tolerance before beginning a session. The product may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Serious cardiovascular conditions Uncontrolled blood-pressure conditions Fever, acute inflammation or active infection Severe dehydration Reduced heat sensitivity Open wounds, burns or severe skin conditions Recent surgery Conditions affecting normal sweating Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Users should: Drink water before and after each session Begin with a lower temperature Start with a shorter session Avoid using the blanket on broken or irritated skin Remove jewelry and metallic items Use the product in a ventilated room Stop immediately if dizziness, pain or discomfort occurs Allow the body to cool gradually after use Disconnect the blanket before cleaning This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical advice should be obtained whenever user suitability is uncertain. Intended Home and Professional Users
This product is suitable for: Home wellness users Beauty salons Professional spas Wellness centers Fitness and recovery facilities Massage professionals Personal trainers Hotels and wellness retreats Businesses expanding their wellness services Users must follow the supplied safety, temperature and operating instructions. Why Choose the WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket? Enjoy Wellness at Home
The foldable design provides a convenient full-body heat experience without requiring a permanent sauna installation. Cover the Full Body
The blanket provides heat coverage across the torso, back, stomach, arms and legs. Customize Every Session
Adjustable temperature, digital controls and customizable session duration allow users to create a comfortable wellness routine. Expand Your Professional Services
Spas, wellness centers and recovery businesses can add infrared heat sessions to memberships, treatment packages and relaxation programs. Protect Your Investment
The product includes a three-year warranty, CE Certificate and professional after-sales support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does the infrared sauna blanket work?
The blanket uses far-infrared heating elements to distribute adjustable warmth across the body. The heat supports relaxation, natural sweating and a full-body wellness experience. What temperature does the blanket reach?
The temperature is adjustable and can reach up to 80°C. Users should begin at a lower setting and increase the temperature gradually according to comfort and heat tolerance. How long does a session take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. First-time users should begin with a shorter session. How often can the blanket be used?
The suggested frequency is up to 3–4 sessions per week according to individual tolerance. Users should allow sufficient recovery and maintain proper hydration. Which body areas does it cover?
The blanket provides full-body coverage, including the torso, back, stomach, arms and legs. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
The temperature is adjustable. Users should select a comfortable heat level and stop immediately if they experience dizziness, pain, breathing difficulty or excessive discomfort. Can the sauna blanket be used at home?
Yes. Its foldable and portable design is suitable for home wellness use when operated according to the supplied safety and temperature instructions. Can professional spas use the blanket?
Yes. Spas, wellness centers, recovery facilities and other suitable businesses can include the sauna blanket in professional wellness programs. How should the blanket be cleaned?
The blanket must be switched off, unplugged and allowed to cool before cleaning. Follow the supplied maintenance instructions and never immerse electrical components in water. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved product components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse, incorrect cleaning and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the product include a CE Certificate?
A CE Certificate is included. Add Far-Infrared Wellness to Your Routine or Business
The WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket combines: Adjustable far-infrared heating Dense internal heat distribution Portable full-body coverage Home and professional wellness applications Three-year warranty and after-sales support Contact Wikbeauty to order the Infrared Sauna Blanket or receive more information about its temperature settings, package contents and operating guidance. Order Your Infrared Sauna Blanket and Request Pricing
Heat Level
Recommended Application
Gentle Heat
First-time use, relaxation and shorter sessions
Moderate Heat
General wellness and comfortable sweating
Higher Heat
Experienced users seeking more intensive warmth
Customized Program
Professional spa packages and personalized home sessions
Treatment Area
Applicable Program
Intended Wellness Application
Full body
Customized heat program
Relaxation and natural sweating
Back and shoulders
Gentle or moderate heat
Tired-muscle relaxation
Torso and stomach
Moderate heat
Body-wellness support
Arms and legs
Customized heat
Full-body warming and relaxation
Post-workout body
Recovery program
Muscle-relaxation support
Spa clients
Professional add-on program
Wellness-package enhancement
Home users
Personal wellness program
Convenient self-care routine
Fitness clients
Recovery program
Post-exercise relaxation
Specification
Details
Product Name
WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket
Product Type
Portable far-infrared heat therapy system
Heating Technology
Far-infrared heating with dense wiring
Maximum Temperature
Adjustable up to 80°C
Coverage Area
Torso, back, stomach, arms and legs
Material
Purple soft-fabric exterior
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Suggested Frequency
Up to 3–4 sessions per week according to tolerance
Temperature Control
Adjustable settings with digital display
Control Method
Wired and remote-control options
Voltage Options
110V and 220V
Design
Foldable and portable
Use Environments
Home, spas, wellness centers and professional clinics
Warranty
Three-year warranty
Support
Professional after-sales assistance
Certificate
CE Certificate
Receives in 7 days.
$560.00
Professional Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Non-Invasive Fat Reduction, Body Slimming, and Contouring System
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support targeted fat reduction, inch loss, and improved body shape without surgery or downtime.
Using 650nm low-level laser therapy, the system delivers controlled red-light energy through multiple laser pads positioned over selected treatment areas. This energy supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells as free fatty acids and glycerol, which are then processed naturally by the body.
With an intelligent touchscreen, multiple body applicators, and universal 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for slimming salons, spas, wellness centers, fitness clinics, and professional aesthetic practices.
650nm Lipo Laser | Multiple Treatment Pads | 20–40-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Lipo Laser Fat-Reduction Technology
The machine uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to target localized fat deposits without surgery, needles, or anesthesia. Multiple laser pads deliver controlled energy across the selected treatment area. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction treatments Waist and abdominal contouring Arm and thigh slimming Hip, flank, and back shaping Buttock contour refinement Body Sculpting and Inch-Loss Treatments
The flexible laser-pad system allows operators to position applicators around different body zones. This supports customized slimming programs based on the client’s proportions and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Waistline definition Abdominal contour improvement Arm and thigh reshaping Hip and flank contouring Multi-area body-sculpting programs Cellulite and Skin-Quality Support
Lipo laser treatments can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve the appearance of uneven skin texture while supporting smoother and firmer-looking skin. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance reduction Skin-texture improvement Firmness and elasticity support Post-slimming skin conditioning Body-smoothing treatments Select the Right Program for Each Client Targeted Fat-Reduction Program
Designed for clients with localized areas of stubborn fat that may be resistant to regular diet and exercise. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waist, hips, thighs, arms, back, and flanks. Recommended for: Clients seeking focused treatment of one or two specific body areas. Complete Body-Contouring Program
A multi-area protocol that uses several laser pads to support balanced body shaping and improved proportions. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, thighs and hips, arms and back, or other compatible area combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking a more comprehensive body-sculpting course. Cellulite and Skin-Smoothing Program
A treatment program focused on the appearance of uneven texture, cellulite, and reduced skin firmness. Recommended applications: Thighs, hips, buttocks, abdomen, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients who want smoother-looking skin alongside body-contouring benefits. Maintenance and Shape-Management Program
A flexible follow-up program designed to support previously achieved contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated body areas requiring periodic maintenance. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and want ongoing body-contouring support. Adjustable Laser and Treatment Settings Treatment settings, session frequency, and pad positioning should be selected according to the client’s assessment, treatment area, comfort, and professional operating protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
Treatment pads can be positioned on suitable upper-body zones where localized fat deposits or reduced definition are present. Treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Back-fat reduction support Flank shaping Waistline definition Improved upper-body proportions Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for professional lipo laser body-contouring programs. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal contouring Waistline slimming Localized inch-loss support Flank and side shaping Improved midsection definition Lower-Body Areas
Multiple pads can be arranged across compatible lower-body treatment zones. Treatment objectives include: Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Hip shaping Buttock contour refinement Cellulite-appearance improvement Smoother-looking lower-body contours Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s treatment goals, medical history, lifestyle, current body condition, and potential contraindications. Step 2: Body Assessment
Identify suitable treatment areas, document measurements when required, and create a personalized treatment plan. Step 3: Laser-Pad Placement
Position the laser pads securely over the selected treatment areas according to the operating protocol. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the appropriate treatment time and operating settings using the intelligent touchscreen interface. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, nutrition, activity, and treatment-course guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine combines a straightforward operating system with flexible applicator placement, making it suitable for a variety of professional body-contouring businesses. Key advantages include: Non-invasive treatment technology Multiple laser pads for flexible positioning Intelligent touchscreen operation Single-area and multi-area treatment capability Approximately 20–40-minute sessions No surgical recovery period 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year warranty Technical Specifications Treatment experiences and visible outcomes may vary according to the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment area, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. Results should not be presented as guaranteed. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine Multiple laser-pad body applicators 1 × Compatible power cable 1 × Warranty card Standard accessories required for machine operation Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guidance Operating instructions Laser-pad placement guidance Treatment protocol training Safety and maintenance instructions After-sales technical support Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help owners and treatment providers use the machine confidently and consistently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Touchscreen operation Laser-pad positioning Treatment-area selection Session configuration Client assessment procedures Safety and contraindication screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Treatment-protocol guidance Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults under normal operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair instructions are issued. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair guidance Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication throughout the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty support team with the machine model and order information. Provide a clear description of the issue. Submit photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the machine. Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Water damage or unsuitable storage conditions Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and contraindication screening should be completed before treatment. The machine should be operated only by trained users following the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Serious cardiovascular conditions Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Severe liver or kidney conditions Uncontrolled diabetes Blood-clotting disorders Active infection or inflammation Open wounds or damaged skin in the treatment area Recent surgery in the intended treatment area Photosensitivity or use of photosensitizing medication Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with medical concerns should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a client consultation before every initial treatment. Inspect the machine, cables, and laser pads before use. Clean and disinfect applicators according to the manual. Position laser pads securely without excessive pressure. Do not apply pads over open wounds or inflamed skin. Do not exceed the recommended treatment time. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Stop treatment if the client experiences an unexpected reaction. Keep the machine away from excessive moisture and heat. Use a stable and correctly grounded power supply. Follow the recommended cleaning and maintenance schedule. Keep accurate treatment records when required. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is suitable for: Body-slimming salons Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Wellness centers Day spas and medical spas Fitness and body-transformation centers Weight-management businesses Professional body-contouring providers Users must follow the supplied operating instructions, complete appropriate training, and comply with local regulations governing aesthetic equipment. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine? 1. Professional 650nm Lipo Laser Technology
The system uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to support non-invasive fat-reduction and body-contouring treatments. 2. Multiple Laser-Pad Applicators
Flexible pad placement allows professionals to target different body areas and create customized treatment programs. 3. Non-Invasive Client Experience
Treatments require no surgery, needles, anesthesia, or extended recovery period, making the service convenient for suitable clients. 4. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, treatment training, technical assistance, and after-sales support. 5. Three-Year Warranty and Certified Quality
The system includes a three-year professional warranty and is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine work?
The system uses 650nm low-level laser energy delivered through body applicators. The treatment supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells into free fatty acids and glycerol, which are processed naturally by the body. Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. Lipo laser is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that does not require surgery, injections, or anesthesia. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Most clients describe the treatment as comfortable and relaxing. Individual sensitivity can vary, so client comfort should be monitored throughout every session. Q: How long does one session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the treatment area and selected protocol. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A complete course generally includes approximately 8–12 sessions. The final recommendation should be based on the client’s assessment and treatment objectives. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice changes after the first few sessions, while more developed results usually require completion of the recommended treatment course. Individual outcomes vary. Q: Which body areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks. Q: Can multiple areas be treated during one session?
The multiple-pad system supports simultaneous placement across compatible treatment zones. Operators must follow the recommended pad arrangement and treatment protocol. Q: Is there any downtime?
Lipo laser treatments generally do not require a surgical recovery period. Suitable clients can normally return to their usual activities after treatment. Q: Can the machine help improve the appearance of cellulite?
The system can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve body contours and the appearance of uneven skin texture. Q: Does the machine provide skin-tightening benefits?
Treatments can support smoother and firmer-looking skin as part of a structured body-contouring program. Q: Are lipo laser results permanent?
Results depend on the client’s lifestyle, nutrition, physical activity, treatment course, and weight stability. The service should not be marketed as guaranteeing permanent fat loss. Q: What should clients do after treatment?
Clients are generally advised to remain hydrated, maintain balanced nutrition, and follow appropriate activity and aftercare guidance provided by the treatment professional. Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client should complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can the machine be used on all skin types?
Low-level laser therapy may be suitable for a broad range of skin types, but individual assessment and contraindication screening remain necessary. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Professional setup, operating, treatment-protocol, safety, and maintenance guidance are included. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Q: What is included with the machine?
The package includes the main machine, multiple laser-pad applicators, a compatible power cable, a user manual and training guide, a warranty card, and standard operating accessories. Add Professional Lipo Laser Slimming to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine gives salons, spas, wellness centers, and aesthetic clinics a versatile solution for non-invasive fat reduction, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-quality treatments. Five key benefits: Professional 650nm low-level laser technology Multiple pads for flexible body-area treatment Non-invasive 20–40-minute sessions Intelligent touchscreen operation CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Laser Wavelength
650nm red light
Supports professional low-level laser body-contouring treatments
Treatment Time
Adjustable within the recommended 20–40-minute range
Allows sessions to be adapted to the selected area and protocol
Laser Pads
Multiple body applicators
Supports simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas
Treatment Area
Single-area or multi-area positioning
Enables targeted and comprehensive body-contouring programs
Treatment Course
Approximately 8–12 sessions recommended
Supports progressive results through a structured treatment plan
Control Interface
Intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient treatment selection and operating control
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Slimming
Abdomen
Support localized fat reduction and improved abdominal contour
Waistline Contouring
Waist and flanks
Create a more defined waistline
Arm Slimming
Upper arms
Improve arm shape and reduce the appearance of localized fullness
Thigh Contouring
Inner and outer thighs
Support smoother and more balanced leg contours
Hip Shaping
Hips
Improve overall body proportions
Back Contouring
Upper and lower back
Target localized fat deposits and improve back definition
Buttock Contouring
Buttocks
Refine shape and improve surrounding contours
Cellulite Care
Thighs, hips, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of uneven skin texture
Skin-Firming Support
Multiple body areas
Support smoother and firmer-looking skin
Multi-Area Sculpting
Combined body zones
Deliver a customized body-contouring program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Technology
Low-Level Laser Therapy
Laser Wavelength
650nm red light
Primary Functions
Fat reduction, body slimming, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-tightening support
Applicators
Multiple laser pads for different body areas
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 8–12 sessions
Display and Controls
Intelligent touchscreen interface
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$999.00
Professional RF Microneedling Device
Controlled-Depth Skin Rejuvenation, Collagen Remodeling, and Tightening System
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is a professional skin-rejuvenation system combining controlled-depth microneedling with radiofrequency energy.
Adjustable microneedles penetrate the skin at depths from 0.5mm to 4.0mm while delivering controlled RF energy into the targeted tissue. This dual action supports the skin’s natural renewal response and stimulates collagen and elastin remodeling.
With four interchangeable cartridge options, adjustable RF intensity, intelligent touchscreen controls, and both facial and body applications, the system is designed for dermatology practices, medical spas, and advanced aesthetic clinics operating within local professional requirements.
Microneedling and RF | 0.5–4.0mm Adjustable Depth | Four Cartridge Options | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform Controlled-Depth Microneedling
The device creates controlled microchannels at carefully selected depths. This process supports the skin’s natural repair response and encourages collagen and elastin production. Common applications include: Fine-line and wrinkle treatments Acne-scar improvement Surgical-scar treatments Stretch-mark improvement Enlarged-pore care Skin-texture refinement Radiofrequency Dermal Heating
RF energy is delivered through the microneedles into the selected tissue depth. This controlled thermal action supports deeper collagen remodeling while limiting unnecessary surface exposure. Common applications include: Skin-tightening treatments Collagen-remodeling programs Firmness and elasticity support Facial and neck rejuvenation Texture improvement Body skin-firming treatments Interchangeable Cartridge Technology
Four cartridge configurations allow professionals to adapt treatments to delicate facial zones, complete facial areas, the neck and décolleté, or larger body regions. Common applications include: Precision under-eye treatments Full-face rejuvenation Face and neck protocols Décolleté treatments Abdominal stretch-mark care Thigh and arm rejuvenation Select the Right Program for Each Client Anti-Aging and Skin-Tightening Program
A professional facial-rejuvenation protocol designed to address fine lines, wrinkles, reduced elasticity, and skin laxity. Recommended applications: Face, jawline, neck, and décolleté. Recommended for: Suitable clients seeking improved firmness, smoother-looking skin, and progressive collagen remodeling. Scar and Texture-Refinement Program
A customized microneedling and RF protocol developed to improve the appearance of acne scars, selected surgical scars, and uneven texture. Recommended applications: Face and compatible body areas containing fully healed scars. Recommended for: Clients seeking gradual improvement in scar appearance, texture, and overall skin smoothness. Stretch-Mark and Body-Rejuvenation Program
A larger-area protocol using the appropriate cartridge and needle depth for body skin concerns. Recommended applications: Abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients seeking improvement in the appearance of stretch marks, uneven body texture, or reduced skin firmness. Maintenance and Collagen-Support Program
A follow-up treatment designed to support previously achieved rejuvenation results and continued collagen stimulation. Recommended applications: Previously treated facial or body areas. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and require periodic maintenance based on professional assessment. Adjustable Needle Depth and RF Treatment Settings
Needle depth and RF intensity must be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area, sensitivity, medical history, and applicable professional protocol. Deeper settings are not automatically better and should only be used when clinically appropriate. Adjustable Treatment Areas Facial Areas
The 10-pin and 25-pin cartridges support precision and full-face treatments across suitable facial zones. Treatment objectives include: Fine-line reduction Wrinkle improvement Acne-scar care Enlarged-pore refinement Skin-texture improvement Firmness and elasticity support More even-looking skin tone Neck and Décolleté Areas
The 25-pin or 36-pin cartridge can support carefully controlled treatments across suitable neck and upper-chest areas. Treatment objectives include: Neck-line improvement Skin-firming support Décolleté rejuvenation Texture refinement Collagen stimulation Improved elasticity Body Areas
The 36-pin and 49-pin cartridges provide wider coverage for compatible body-treatment zones. Treatment objectives include: Stretch-mark improvement Abdominal skin rejuvenation Thigh-texture refinement Upper-arm firming Selected scar treatments Smoother-looking body skin Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s skin concerns, medical history, medications, previous procedures, healing response, sun exposure, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Skin Assessment
Evaluate skin type, treatment area, concern severity, sensitivity, and suitability. Select the appropriate cartridge, needle depth, RF intensity, and treatment pattern. Step 3: Skin Preparation
Cleanse and disinfect the treatment area according to clinical protocol. Apply a suitable topical anesthetic when professionally indicated and permitted, then remove it completely before treatment. Step 4: Controlled RF Microneedling Treatment
Install a new sterile cartridge, confirm the selected settings, and perform the treatment using consistent passes and controlled coverage. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Apply professionally appropriate post-treatment products and provide written aftercare instructions covering sun protection, cleansing, hydration, skincare restrictions, and expected temporary reactions. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device combines adjustable depth, controlled RF intensity, four cartridge options, and intelligent operation for professional skin-rejuvenation services. Key advantages include: Combined microneedling and RF technology Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm needle depth Adjustable radiofrequency intensity Four interchangeable cartridge configurations Precision facial and larger body applications Approximately 20–40-minute sessions Structured 3–6-session treatment courses Intelligent touchscreen operation 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications Treatment response, downtime, improvement timeline, and result duration vary according to skin condition, age, treatment depth, RF intensity, treatment course, healing response, lifestyle, sun exposure, and aftercare compliance. Results should not be presented as guaranteed. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device Compatible professional treatment handpiece Multiple interchangeable needle cartridges 10-pin cartridge configuration 25-pin cartridge configuration 36-pin cartridge configuration 49-pin cartridge configuration 1 × Compatible power cable Standard operating accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Touchscreen operating instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Needle-depth guidance RF-setting guidance Treatment-protocol information Contraindication and safety instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional operator training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help qualified users understand the machine’s setup, treatment settings, cartridge selection, and maintenance requirements. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Intelligent touchscreen operation Treatment-handpiece preparation Sterile cartridge installation Cartridge selection by treatment area Needle-depth adjustment RF-intensity selection Treatment-pattern guidance Client consultation and skin assessment Contraindication screening Infection-control procedures Post-treatment care Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Training supplied with the machine does not replace any professional license, medical supervision, infection-control qualification, or legal authorization required in the operator’s location. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before repair guidance or replacement parts are supplied. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed description of the technical problem. Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the issue. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect operation or treatment setup Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Liquid damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow cleaning and maintenance instructions Use of incompatible cartridges or accessories Normal wear of handpieces, cables, and consumable components Used or disposable needle cartridges Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
RF microneedling is a professional procedure requiring appropriate training, infection-control practices, and compliance with local licensing or medical-supervision requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Active skin infection Herpes outbreak Open wounds or sores Active inflammation in the treatment area Recent sunburn or excessive sun exposure Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Severe keloid-scarring tendency Blood-clotting or bleeding disorders Current anticoagulant treatment without medical clearance Autoimmune conditions affecting healing Uncontrolled diabetes Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Recent isotretinoin use Reduced skin sensation Poor wound-healing history Recent injectable or surgical treatment in the area Any condition requiring professional medical clearance A waiting period of approximately 6–12 months after isotretinoin use may be appropriate, but the client must follow the advice of their prescribing healthcare professional. Operating Precautions
Complete a detailed consultation and skin assessment. Confirm the operator is legally permitted to perform RF microneedling. Obtain informed consent before treatment. Document the client’s medical history and current medications. Examine the skin for infection, wounds, irritation, and recent sun exposure. Use a new, sterile, single-use needle cartridge for every client and session. Never reuse disposable needle cartridges. Clean and disinfect the handpiece and treatment environment properly. Select needle depth according to the treatment area and concern. Adjust RF intensity according to skin response and tolerance. Do not assume that deeper penetration produces better results. Monitor the skin continuously during treatment. Stop treatment if an unexpected reaction occurs. Avoid overlapping passes beyond the professional protocol. Follow appropriate sharps-disposal procedures. Provide complete written aftercare guidance. Maintain accurate treatment records. Follow all local infection-control and clinical-waste requirements. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is intended for appropriately qualified users, which may include: Dermatology practices Medical spas Aesthetic medical clinics Licensed healthcare professionals Physicians Qualified nurses or nurse practitioners Properly trained aesthetic practitioners under required supervision Advanced beauty clinics where legally permitted Licensing, supervision, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements vary by location. Buyers and operators are responsible for confirming all applicable local requirements before providing treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device? 1. Combined Microneedling and RF Technology
The system combines controlled micro-injury with targeted RF energy to support both surface renewal and deeper collagen remodeling. 2. Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm Needle Depth
Variable penetration enables qualified professionals to adapt treatments to different skin concerns, areas, and protocols. 3. Four Specialized Cartridge Options
The 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin configurations support precision facial work, full-face rejuvenation, extended areas, and body treatments. 4. Facial and Body Treatment Capability
One platform supports treatments for the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The device includes CE and ISO certificates, professional operating guidance, technical support, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does RF microneedling work?
The device inserts microneedles at a controlled depth while delivering RF energy into the targeted tissue. Microneedling supports the skin’s natural repair response, while RF heating promotes deeper collagen and elastin remodeling. Q: How is RF microneedling different from standard microneedling?
Standard microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling adds thermal energy at the selected tissue depth, providing an additional collagen-remodeling and skin-firming action. Q: What needle depths are available?
The needle depth is adjustable from approximately 0.5mm to 4.0mm. Q: Is the same needle depth used for every treatment?
No. Depth must be selected according to the treatment area, skin thickness, concern, client sensitivity, and professional protocol. Q: Which cartridges are included?
The system includes 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin cartridge options. Q: What is the 10-pin cartridge used for?
The 10-pin cartridge supports precise treatment of small or delicate areas, including selected under-eye, nose, mouth, and small-scar applications. Q: What is the 25-pin cartridge used for?
The 25-pin cartridge is designed for standard full-face rejuvenation, wrinkle care, skin tightening, and general texture improvement. Q: What is the 36-pin cartridge used for?
The 36-pin cartridge provides wider coverage for the face, neck, décolleté, and other extended treatment zones. Q: What is the 49-pin cartridge used for?
The 49-pin cartridge supports larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, and upper arms, including stretch-mark treatments. Q: Which skin concerns can the machine address?
Professional applications include fine lines, wrinkles, acne scars, selected surgical scars, stretch marks, enlarged pores, reduced firmness, and uneven texture. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. Q: How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, excluding consultation, cleansing, and topical-anesthetic time. Q: Is topical anesthetic required?
A topical anesthetic may be used when professionally appropriate and legally permitted. The operator must follow the product instructions and local requirements. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Client experience varies. With suitable preparation and correctly selected settings, most clients describe temporary pressure, warmth, or prickling rather than severe pain. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A typical starting course includes approximately 3–6 sessions. Q: How far apart should treatments be scheduled?
Sessions are commonly spaced approximately 4–6 weeks apart to allow the skin to recover and remodel. Q: Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, or mild swelling may last approximately 1–2 days. Recovery varies according to the treatment depth, RF intensity, area, and individual response. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients notice early texture improvements after initial sessions. Collagen remodeling develops gradually, with more visible changes commonly appearing over several weeks. Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 12–18 months with suitable skincare and maintenance. Individual result duration varies. Q: Is RF microneedling suitable for every skin tone?
Adjustable settings may allow trained professionals to treat a broad range of skin tones. However, suitability and settings must be determined through an individual assessment. Q: Can active acne be treated?
Treatment should not be performed over active infection, open lesions, or significant inflammation. The client should be assessed by an appropriately qualified professional. Q: Can the device be used on scars?
It can support treatments for fully healed acne scars and selected surgical scars. Active wounds and incompletely healed tissue must not be treated. Q: Are cartridges reusable?
Needle cartridges should be sterile and single-use. A new cartridge must be used for every client and every treatment session. Q: What aftercare is recommended?
Clients should follow the professional aftercare plan, use broad-spectrum SPF 30 or higher, avoid harsh skincare for approximately 3–5 days, and avoid swimming, saunas, and excessive heat for at least 48 hours. Q: Who can operate the device?
The operator must have the qualifications, training, licensing, supervision, and insurance required in the location where treatments are provided. Q: Does training come with the machine?
Yes. Professional machine-operation and treatment guidance are included. This training does not replace legally required clinical qualifications or licenses. Q: What certificates are included?
The device is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Clinic
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device provides qualified clinics and aesthetic professionals with an adjustable platform for skin rejuvenation, collagen remodeling, wrinkle care, scar improvement, stretch-mark treatments, and skin tightening. Five key benefits: Combined microneedling and radiofrequency technology Adjustable needle depth from 0.5mm to 4.0mm Four interchangeable cartridge configurations Facial, neck, décolleté, and body applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, professional training details, and technical support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Needle Depth
Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
Adapts penetration to the skin concern, treatment area, and professional protocol
RF Intensity
Adjustable energy control
Customizes thermal delivery according to skin condition and tolerance
10-Pin Cartridge
Precision cartridge
Treats small and delicate facial areas
25-Pin Cartridge
Standard facial cartridge
Supports complete facial rejuvenation
36-Pin Cartridge
Extended-coverage cartridge
Treats the face, neck, and décolleté efficiently
49-Pin Cartridge
Large-area body cartridge
Supports stretch-mark and body-rejuvenation treatments
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Allows sessions to be adapted to the treatment area
Treatment Course
Approximately 3–6 sessions
Supports progressive collagen remodeling
Session Interval
Approximately 4–6 weeks
Allows suitable skin-recovery time between treatments
Control Interface
Intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient depth, intensity, and program control
Power Supply
110V/220V compatibility
Supports use in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Fine-Line Treatment
Face and eye contour
Improve the appearance of superficial lines
Wrinkle Reduction
Face and neck
Support collagen remodeling and smoother-looking skin
Acne-Scar Care
Face
Improve the appearance of fully healed acne scars
Surgical-Scar Care
Suitable healed scars
Support gradual texture remodeling
Skin Tightening
Face, neck, abdomen, and arms
Improve the appearance of firmness and elasticity
Pore Refinement
Face
Reduce the visible appearance of enlarged pores
Texture Improvement
Face and body
Support smoother and more even-looking skin
Stretch-Mark Care
Abdomen, thighs, and arms
Improve the appearance of stretch marks
Décolleté Rejuvenation
Upper chest
Address texture, lines, and reduced firmness
Collagen Maintenance
Previously treated areas
Support ongoing skin-renewal programs
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device
Technology
Controlled-depth microneedling and radiofrequency energy
Needle-Depth Range
Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
RF Energy
Adjustable intensity control
Cartridge Options
10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin
10-Pin Application
Under-eye area, nose, mouth area, small scars, and precision treatments
25-Pin Application
Standard full-face rejuvenation and wrinkle treatments
36-Pin Application
Face, neck, décolleté, and extended treatment zones
49-Pin Application
Abdomen, thighs, arms, stretch marks, and larger body areas
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and arms
Primary Functions
Skin rejuvenation, wrinkle reduction, scar care, stretch-mark improvement, skin tightening, pore refinement, and texture improvement
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 3–6 sessions
Recommended Interval
Approximately 4–6 weeks
Expected Downtime
Commonly 1–2 days of temporary redness or swelling
Results Duration
Supplied estimate of approximately 12–18 months with suitable maintenance
Display and Controls
Intelligent touchscreen interface
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$2,599.00
Professional RF Microneedling and Skin-Remodeling System
Fractional Radiofrequency Technology for Skin Tightening, Collagen Stimulation, and Body Contouring
The Morpheus 8 is a professional fractional radiofrequency microneedling system developed for facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, texture improvement, scar treatments, and body-contouring programs.
The system combines precision microneedling with controlled radiofrequency energy. Microneedles create fractional microchannels while delivering RF energy into selected tissue depths, supporting collagen and elastin remodeling below the skin’s surface.
With a 500W maximum power output, adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth, four cartridge options, and a 10.4-inch control screen, the system can be customized for delicate facial areas, deeper facial treatments, and larger body areas.
Fractional RF microneedling | 0.2–7.0mm adjustable depth | Four cartridge options | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform Fractional Microneedling
Precision-engineered needle cartridges create controlled microchannels within the selected treatment area. This fractional process supports the skin’s natural renewal response while leaving surrounding tissue untreated. Common applications include: Fine-line treatments Wrinkle-reduction programs Enlarged-pore treatments Uneven skin-texture improvement Acne-scar treatments General facial rejuvenation Body skin-renewal programs Radiofrequency Energy
The system delivers controlled radiofrequency energy through the microneedles and into the targeted tissue depth. This creates a thermal response designed to support collagen contraction and progressive tissue remodeling. Common applications include: Skin-tightening treatments Collagen-remodeling programs Facial-laxity improvement Jawline and lower-face contouring Neck rejuvenation Body skin-firming treatments Subdermal tissue-remodeling programs Subdermal Adipose Remodeling
Adjustable needle penetration allows practitioners to work at different tissue depths according to the treatment area and professional protocol. Deeper treatments may be incorporated into subdermal adipose remodeling programs for selected areas where clients are concerned about mild localized fullness, reduced definition, or loose-looking skin. Common applications include: Submental-area contouring Lower-face and jowl definition Abdominal contouring Thigh treatments Buttock skin-firming programs Body texture improvement Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial Rejuvenation Program
Designed to address common signs of aging and uneven facial texture with customized needle depth and RF intensity. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Enlarged pores Uneven skin texture Reduced skin firmness General collagen-remodeling treatments Recommended for: Clients seeking non-surgical facial rejuvenation Clients concerned about early signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement Skin-Tightening Program
Focuses on areas affected by reduced firmness, laxity, or weakened facial definition. Recommended applications: Lower-face laxity Jawline definition Neck tightening Jowl-area treatment Mildly loose-looking skin Recommended for: Clients seeking firmer-looking skin Clients concerned about facial contours Clients interested in non-surgical tightening programs Scar and Texture Program
Combines fractional microneedling and controlled RF energy to support progressive remodeling of uneven or scarred tissue. Recommended applications: Acne scars Uneven surface texture Enlarged pores Irregular skin appearance Selected body scars Recommended for: Clients with suitable acne scarring Clients seeking smoother-looking skin Clients requiring a structured multi-session program Body-Remodeling Program
Uses deeper adjustable settings and suitable cartridges for larger treatment areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal skin tightening Thigh texture improvement Buttock skin-firming treatments Bra-line and décolletage treatments Selected body-contouring programs Recommended for: Clients concerned about loose-looking body skin Clients seeking improved body texture Clients suitable for deeper RF microneedling protocols Four Interchangeable Cartridge Options
The system includes four cartridge configurations, allowing practitioners to select the appropriate coverage, penetration pattern, and treatment precision. Cartridge selection should be based on the treatment area, client condition, desired penetration depth, and professional protocol. Adjustable Needle Depth for Precise Treatment
Needle depth can be adjusted from 0.2mm to 7.0mm, enabling practitioners to tailor treatments for different facial and body areas. These ranges are general references only. Actual settings must be selected by a trained professional following client assessment and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face and Eye Area
Shallower settings and appropriate cartridges can be selected for delicate or detailed facial treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Fine-line reduction Under-eye skin rejuvenation Pore refinement Texture improvement Facial collagen stimulation Lower Face, Jawline, and Neck
Customized medium or deeper settings can support tightening and contour-enhancement programs. Common treatment objectives include: Lower-face tightening Jowl-area improvement Jawline definition Submental contouring Neck skin rejuvenation Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper settings and wider cartridges can be selected for larger body treatment areas. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal skin tightening Thigh texture improvement Buttock skin-firming treatments Body collagen remodeling Selected subdermal contouring programs Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, skin condition, treatment concerns, previous procedures, medications, and possible contraindications. Establish realistic treatment objectives and obtain informed consent. Step 2: Skin Preparation
Clean and disinfect the treatment area according to professional hygiene protocols. Apply topical numbing cream when appropriate and remove it completely before beginning treatment. Step 3: Cartridge and Setting Selection
Choose the correct cartridge, needle depth, RF frequency, energy level, and treatment pattern according to the client’s skin condition and selected treatment area. Step 4: Fractional RF Microneedling Treatment
Move the handpiece systematically across the selected area. The microneedles create fractional microchannels while delivering controlled RF energy at the chosen depth. Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Complete the treatment according to protocol, inspect the treated area, and provide appropriate aftercare instructions. Recommend gentle skincare and suitable sun protection during recovery. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Morpheus 8 combines customizable treatment settings with professional facial and body applications. Key advantages include: Fractional microneedling and RF energy on one platform Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth Four interchangeable cartridge options 500W maximum output power Adjustable 1–15MHz RF frequency Dedicated 6MHz Thermagica mode 10.4-inch control screen Facial and body treatment capability Multiple treatment-area sizes Compact 13.3kg professional system CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Professional training and lifetime technical support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Morpheus 8 main machine 1 × RF microneedling treatment handpiece 1 × Thermagica treatment handpiece or applicable system attachment 12-pin cartridge configuration 24-pin cartridge configuration 40-pin cartridge configuration Nano cartridge configuration 1 × Universal or region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories The final cartridge quantities and package configuration should follow the selected order. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Needle-depth protocol guidance Facial treatment protocols Body treatment protocols Client consultation materials Aftercare guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Morpheus 8 system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the machine safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Control-screen operation Client consultation and screening Skin assessment Cartridge selection Needle-depth adjustment RF frequency and energy selection Facial treatment protocols Body treatment protocols Treatment hygiene and cartridge handling Post-treatment care Machine cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Morpheus 8 includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Consumable cartridges and components subject to normal wear are not included unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover consumable cartridges, normal wear, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications A detailed consultation, health-history assessment, and skin evaluation should be completed before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals according to the supplied manual and local regulations. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active infection in the treatment area Open wounds or active skin lesions Uncontrolled medical or autoimmune conditions Recent isotretinoin use Active herpes simplex in the treatment area Significant keloid tendency Recent surgery or injectable treatment in the area Blood-clotting disorders Medications that affect healing or bleeding Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Individual risks and suitability should be assessed professionally. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever required. Pre-Treatment and Aftercare Guidance Before Treatment
Complete a professional skin consultation. Review medications and previous procedures. Avoid treating active infections or damaged skin. Remove makeup and disinfect the area. Apply topical numbing cream when appropriate. Obtain documented informed consent. After Treatment
Use gentle skincare during the initial recovery period. Avoid aggressive exfoliation and strong active ingredients. Avoid unnecessary heat and intense exercise as professionally advised. Protect the treated area from excessive sun exposure. Apply suitable broad-spectrum sunscreen. Do not scratch, pick, or irritate the treated skin. Follow all individualized practitioner instructions. Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, pinpoint marks, or mild crusting may occur. Recovery experience varies according to treatment depth, energy, area, and individual skin response. Intended Professional Users
The Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is suitable for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Dermatology practices Skin-rejuvenation centers Cosmetic treatment clinics Professional beauty centers Body-contouring facilities Practitioners should review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing RF microneedling treatments. Why Choose the Morpheus 8?
Dual-Action RF Microneedling
The system combines fractional microneedling and radiofrequency energy, allowing practitioners to create controlled microchannels and deliver RF energy at selected tissue depths. Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm Depth
A wide needle-depth range supports superficial facial rejuvenation, deeper scar treatments, skin tightening, and selected body-remodeling programs. Four Cartridge Configurations
The 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano options provide different levels of precision and treatment coverage for facial and body applications. Face and Body Versatility
One professional platform can support treatments for the face, eye area, jawline, neck, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and décolletage. Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, treatment guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Morpheus 8?
The Morpheus 8 is a professional fractional RF microneedling system that combines controlled microneedling with radiofrequency energy for skin rejuvenation, tightening, texture improvement, and selected body treatments. How is RF microneedling different from conventional microneedling?
Conventional microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling also delivers radiofrequency energy at a selected depth, providing an additional thermal response within the targeted tissue. What needle depths are available?
The machine provides an adjustable needle-depth range from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. The appropriate setting depends on the treatment area, skin condition, selected cartridge, and professional protocol. Which cartridges are included?
The available configurations are 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano. Final quantities should be confirmed according to the selected package. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, under-eye region, lower face, jawline, neck, décolletage, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas. How long does one session take?
A typical session takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the size of the treatment area, selected protocol, and preparation time. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied treatment information indicates that one to four sessions may be used, commonly spaced approximately four to six weeks apart. The final course should be personalized following professional assessment. Is there recovery time?
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, or pinpoint marks may occur. The source information indicates approximately one to three days of visible downtime, although deeper treatments may require a longer recovery period. Can the system be used for acne scars?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive fractional RF microneedling treatments designed to support progressive collagen remodeling and improve the appearance of acne scars and uneven texture. Can it be used for body treatments?
Yes. Its adjustable depth and different cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, décolletage, and other suitable areas. Are results identical for every client?
No. Results and recovery vary according to age, skin condition, treatment depth, energy level, number of sessions, aftercare, and individual biological response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Machine operation, cartridge selection, needle-depth guidance, treatment protocols, safety procedures, cleaning, maintenance, and ongoing technical support are included. Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Business
The Morpheus 8 enables aesthetic clinics, medical spas, and skin professionals to provide customizable facial rejuvenation, collagen-remodeling, skin-tightening, scar, and body-treatment programs. Five key benefits: Fractional microneedling and RF energy on one platform Adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm Four cartridge options for precise facial and body treatments CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Cartridge
Treatment Purpose
Recommended Areas
12-Pin Cartridge
Precise, concentrated treatment
Small facial areas, scars, and detailed treatments
24-Pin Cartridge
Balanced facial coverage
Face, jawline, neck, and general rejuvenation
40-Pin Cartridge
Wider treatment coverage
Larger facial zones and body areas
Nano Cartridge
Superficial, non-needle skin treatment
Delicate areas and surface-level skin programs
Depth Range
General Treatment Level
Possible Applications
0.2–0.5mm
Superficial
Surface texture and delicate areas
0.5–1.5mm
Light facial treatment
Fine lines, pores, and general rejuvenation
1.5–3.0mm
Medium-depth treatment
Texture, scars, tightening, and collagen remodeling
3.0–4.0mm
Deep facial or body treatment
Lower-face, neck, and selected body applications
4.0–7.0mm
Deeper body treatment
Subdermal and larger body-area protocols
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Suitable Program
Under-Eye Area
Delicate texture and fine-line improvement
Facial rejuvenation
Face
Collagen stimulation, pore refinement, and wrinkle treatment
Facial rejuvenation
Acne Scars
Progressive scar and texture remodeling
Scar and texture
Lower Face and Jowls
Tightening and contour improvement
Skin tightening
Jawline
Definition and submental-area treatment
Skin tightening
Neck and Décolletage
Firming and texture improvement
Facial or body remodeling
Abdomen
Skin tightening and subdermal remodeling
Body remodeling
Thighs
Texture improvement and firming
Body remodeling
Buttocks
Skin-quality and firmness improvement
Body remodeling
Specification
Details
Product Name
Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine
Technology
Fractional radiofrequency microneedling
Maximum Output Power
500W
RF Frequency—Microneedling
1–15MHz adjustable
RF Frequency—Thermagica
6MHz
Needle Cartridges
12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano
Adjustable Needle Depth
0.2–7.0mm
Treatment-Area Sizes
1.1 × 1.1cm, 1.6 × 1.6cm, 1.6 × 1.5cm, and 2 × 2cm
Display
10.4-inch control screen
Input Voltage
100V, 110V, or 220V
Machine Dimensions
40 × 36 × 81cm
Machine Weight
13.3kg
Package Dimensions
49 × 46 × 102cm
Package Weight
28.4kg
Treatment Areas
Face, eyes, jawline, neck, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and décolletage
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$2,153.00
Professional Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Therapy System
Adjustable Air-Pressure Technology for Physiotherapy, Recovery, Body, and ED Applications
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B is a professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave system developed for physiotherapy, musculoskeletal rehabilitation, sports recovery, cellulite treatments, body-contouring programs, and professionally administered erectile-function protocols.
Its high-performance compressor accelerates an internal projectile inside the treatment handpiece, creating controlled pressure waves that are transferred into the selected treatment area through interchangeable heads.
The system provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar, frequency from 1 to 21Hz, eleven treatment heads, continuous and pulse modes, six preload settings, an impact counter, and an upgraded ED treatment interface.
0.5–6 Bar pressure | Eleven treatment heads | 1–21Hz frequency | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The ESWT-KP-B uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the treatment handpiece. When the projectile reaches the selected treatment head, it generates mechanical pressure waves that travel into the targeted tissue. Common applications include: Physiotherapy treatments Musculoskeletal rehabilitation Sports-injury recovery Tendon and soft-tissue programs Cellulite treatments Body-contouring programs Professional erectile-function protocols Adjustable Continuous and Pulse Modes The system includes two delivery options for different professional treatment strategies. C Mode delivers continuous impacts according to the selected frequency. P Mode provides pulsed delivery for protocols requiring a different impact pattern. Common benefits include: Customizable treatment delivery Different programs for different conditions Adjustable client-comfort levels Precise impact management Flexible professional protocols Dedicated ED Treatment Software
The upgraded software includes a dedicated interface for professionally administered erectile-function protocols. It supports treatment-zone management, parameter adjustment, and accurate impact counting. Common features include: Dedicated ED treatment mode Five-zone treatment planning Adjustable pressure and frequency Real-time impact counting Structured multi-session protocols Professional treatment documentation ED applications should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Select the Right Program for Each Client Physiotherapy Program
Designed for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and soft-tissue conditions. Recommended applications: Tendon and soft-tissue treatments Shoulder, elbow, and wrist programs Hip, knee, and ankle treatments Plantar-area treatments Chronic musculoskeletal concerns Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Rehabilitation clients Adults with professionally assessed musculoskeletal conditions Sports-Recovery Program
Uses customizable pressure, frequency, and treatment heads to support targeted recovery programs. Recommended applications: Overuse-related conditions Tendon recovery Muscle and soft-tissue rehabilitation Post-activity recovery support Suitable sports injuries Recommended for: Athletes Active adults Fitness and recovery clients Sports-rehabilitation facilities Anti-Cellulite and Body Program
Uses radial or flat treatment heads for broader body areas and professional aesthetic protocols. Recommended applications: Cellulite appearance treatments Body-texture improvement Localized body-contouring programs Skin-firming support Soft-tissue stimulation Recommended for: Clients concerned about visible cellulite Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clinics offering structured body-care programs Erectile-Function Treatment Program
Uses the upgraded ED treatment software and suitable heads for professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols. Recommended applications: Professionally assessed erectile-function concerns Vascular-support treatment programs Structured acoustic-wave treatment courses Men’s intimate wellness services Recommended for: Appropriately screened adult male clients Specialist men’s wellness clinics Qualified healthcare or wellness professionals Adjustable Pressure, Frequency, and Treatment Settings The ESWT-KP-B allows practitioners to customize shockwave treatments according to the selected application, treatment area, and client tolerance. All parameters should be selected according to professional assessment, treatment objectives, client response, and the supplied operating protocols. Eleven Interchangeable Treatment Heads
The ESWT-KP-B includes radial, focus, and flat treatment heads in sizes ranging from 6mm to 25mm. Radial Treatment Heads
Radial heads disperse pressure waves across a wider tissue area. Common applications include: Larger muscle groups Broad soft-tissue regions Cellulite treatments General physiotherapy programs Body-contouring applications Focus Treatment Heads
Focus heads concentrate the mechanical energy within a smaller treatment area. Common applications include: Localized treatment points Tendon attachments Small musculoskeletal areas Focused rehabilitation programs Selected ED treatment zones Flat Treatment Heads
Flat heads provide controlled contact across suitable surface areas. Common applications include: Body-texture treatments Surface-level soft-tissue applications Cellulite programs Medium-sized treatment regions General wellness treatments Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
Different head sizes and pressure settings can be selected for upper-body physiotherapy and recovery programs. Common treatment areas include: Shoulder Elbow Hand and wrist Upper back Suitable arm muscles and tendons Lower-Body Areas
The treatment head and parameters can be customized according to the location and size of the lower-body treatment area. Common treatment areas include: Hip Knee Thigh Achilles tendon Foot and ankle Plantar area Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Suitable heads and dedicated software support professionally administered body and intimate wellness protocols. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist Buttocks Inner and outer thighs Legs Professionally assessed ED treatment zones Professional Treatment Applications Common Musculoskeletal Applications The ESWT-KP-B may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with: Tennis elbow Tendinitis and tendinopathy Plantar fasciitis Frozen shoulder Achilles tendon concerns Ankle, knee, and wrist concerns Shoulder impingement Rotator-cuff concerns Lumbar and hip discomfort Chronic musculoskeletal concerns Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation Professionally assessed calcification concerns Diagnosis, suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment goals, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Program and Head Selection
Select the appropriate physiotherapy, aesthetic, sports-recovery, rehabilitation, or ED program. Install the treatment head suited to the area and protocol. Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select continuous or pulse mode, pressure, frequency, preload, and total impact count. Begin with conservative settings and adjust progressively according to client response. Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client comfort. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the coupling medium, inspect the area, document the treatment settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The ESWT-KP-B combines adjustable pneumatic shockwave technology with a compact footprint and extensive treatment-head selection. Key advantages include: Professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave technology Adjustable 0.5–6 Bar pressure Adjustable 1–21Hz frequency Continuous and pulse delivery modes Six customizable preload settings Eleven interchangeable treatment heads Radial, focus, and flat head designs Head sizes from 6mm to 25mm Upgraded ED treatment software Real-time impact counter 8-inch color touchscreen Easy projectile-replacement mechanism 200W power output Compact 58 × 46 × 38cm package CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Professional training and lifetime support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B main unit 1 × Pneumatic ballistic treatment handpiece 4 × Radial treatment heads 4 × Focus treatment heads 3 × Flat treatment heads 11 × Total treatment heads 1 × Integrated 8-inch touchscreen Continuous and pulse treatment modes Six preload settings Real-time impact counter Upgraded ED treatment software Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Pneumatic shockwave operation training Treatment-head selection guidance Pressure and frequency adjustment guidance Physiotherapy protocol training Sports-recovery protocol training Anti-cellulite protocol training ED treatment protocol training Client-screening documentation Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every ESWT-KP-B includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Pneumatic handpiece operation Treatment-head selection Pressure and frequency adjustment Continuous and pulse modes Preload and impact-count settings Physiotherapy applications Sports-recovery applications Anti-cellulite applications ED treatment software Projectile replacement Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Treatment heads, projectiles, sealing components, and other parts subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The ESWT-KP-B should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active thrombosis or blood clots Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Severely impaired sensation Active growth plates in children Recent surgery within the treatment area Metal implants requiring medical clearance Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision Additional considerations for ED treatments include: Active penile or genital infection Active inflammation in the treatment area Penile implants or prostheses Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements. Operating Precautions Inspect the machine, handpiece, cables, and treatment heads before use. Select the correct treatment head for the application. Begin with conservative pressure and frequency settings. Increase parameters progressively according to client response. Use suitable coupling medium where required. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas. Record pressure, frequency, mode, and impact count. Clean and disinfect reusable components after treatment. Replace worn projectiles and components as directed. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine facilities Musculoskeletal treatment practices Men’s wellness clinics Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Integrated wellness centers Qualified medical and allied-health practices Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering shockwave treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B?
Adjustable Pneumatic Shockwave Technology
The system provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz for personalized professional protocols. Eleven Treatment Heads
Radial, focus, and flat heads in sizes from 6mm to 25mm support precise and broad treatment areas. Dedicated ED Treatment Software
The upgraded interface provides structured treatment-zone management, adjustable parameters, and impact tracking for professionally administered protocols. Multiple Professional Applications
One platform supports physiotherapy, sports recovery, musculoskeletal rehabilitation, cellulite treatments, body contouring, and ED programs. Complete Professional Support
The package includes clinical operation training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the ESWT-KP-B?
The ESWT-KP-B is a professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave system that generates mechanical pressure waves through a compressor-powered treatment handpiece. How does pneumatic ballistic shockwave work?
Compressed air accelerates a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the selected treatment head, creating pressure waves that transfer into the targeted tissue. What pressure and frequency ranges are available?
The machine provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz. How many treatment heads are included?
The system includes eleven heads: four radial, four focus, and three flat treatment heads. What is the difference between the treatment heads?
Radial heads provide broader pressure-wave distribution, focus heads concentrate treatment on smaller areas, and flat heads provide controlled contact for suitable surface and body applications. Which treatment modes are available?
The machine includes continuous and pulse delivery modes, six preload settings, and an upgraded ED treatment interface. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, lumbar region, hip, knee, thigh, Achilles tendon, foot, ankle, abdomen, waist, buttocks, legs, and suitable ED treatment zones. Can the machine be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. Radial and flat treatment heads can be incorporated into professional cellulite and body-texture programs. Can it support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. The machine includes upgraded ED software and suitable treatment heads. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements. Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, condition, pressure, frequency, and individual sensitivity. Settings can be adjusted during the session to maintain appropriate tolerance. How many sessions are recommended?
The number and frequency of sessions depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and treatment protocol. Results and required course length should not be guaranteed. Can it be combined with other treatments?
It may be incorporated into a broader professional treatment plan when the combination is appropriate, compatible, and permitted within the practitioner’s scope. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, treatment-head selection, pressure and frequency settings, treatment protocols, safety, client screening, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Pneumatic Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B enables qualified clinics and wellness facilities to provide customizable pneumatic shockwave treatments using one compact professional platform. Five key benefits: Adjustable pneumatic pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar Frequency control from 1 to 21Hz Eleven radial, focus, and flat treatment heads Dedicated ED software with continuous and pulse modes CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Pressure
0.5–6 Bar
Adjustable treatment intensity
Frequency
1–21Hz
Customizable impact-delivery speed
Delivery Modes
Continuous and pulse
Different treatment patterns
Preload Settings
Six
Customizable projectile response
Treatment Heads
Eleven
Small, medium, and broad treatment areas
Impact Counter
Real-time tracking
Accurate session documentation
Display
8-inch touchscreen
Parameter and protocol management
Head Type
Available Sizes
General Application
Radial Heads
10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm
Broad soft-tissue and body-area treatments
Focus Heads
6mm, 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm
Concentrated and targeted applications
Flat Heads
10mm, 15mm, and 20mm
Controlled surface and body treatments
Total Heads
Eleven
Complete professional treatment selection
Treatment Category
Common Applications
Suggested Head Type
Physiotherapy
Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue programs
Focus or radial
Sports Recovery
Tendon, muscle, and overuse-related conditions
Protocol-dependent
Rehabilitation
Functional recovery and localized discomfort
Focus or radial
Cellulite Treatments
Cellulite appearance and body texture
Radial or flat
Body Contouring
Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs
Radial
Erectile-Function Programs
Professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols
Suitable focus head
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B
Model
ESWT-KP-B
Technology
Pneumatic ballistic shockwave
Energy Range
0.5–6 Bar
Frequency Range
1–21Hz
Power Output
200W
Treatment Handpieces
One pneumatic ballistic handpiece
Treatment Heads
Eleven
Head Types
Radial, focus, and flat
Head Sizes
6–25mm
Radial Heads
10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm
Focus Heads
6mm, 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm
Flat Heads
10mm, 15mm, and 20mm
Display
8-inch color touchscreen
Delivery Modes
Continuous and pulse
Preload Settings
Six
ED Treatment Software
Upgraded dedicated protocol
Impact Counter
Real-time session tracking
Package Dimensions
58 × 46 × 38cm
Volume Weight
28kg
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Receives in 7 days.
Strengthen pelvic floor muscles through a comfortable, fully clothed treatment experience. The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair uses professional HIEMT technology to stimulate thousands of deep pelvic floor muscle contractions without surgery, needles or physical exercise.
During a 30-minute session, the machine can generate up to 12,000 Kegel-equivalent muscle contractions, helping professional clinics offer efficient, non-invasive pelvic floor training.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Pelvic Floor Chair?
- Up to 12,000 Kegel-equivalent contractions per session
- Professional HIEMT electromagnetic stimulation
- Non-invasive and needle-free
- Treatment performed while the client remains fully clothed
- Comfortable 30-minute sessions
- No anesthesia or recovery time
- Adjustable energy output
- Easy-to-use touchscreen control
- Suitable for professional clinics and wellness centers
- Three-year machine warranty
Professional HIEMT Pelvic Floor Technology
HIEMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to the pelvic floor area. This energy stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that would be difficult to achieve through voluntary Kegel exercises alone.
The treatment is designed to activate and train deep pelvic floor muscles while the client sits comfortably in the chair. Intensity can be adjusted according to the client’s comfort level and treatment plan.
Common Applications
This professional Kegel machine may be incorporated into programs designed to support:
- Pelvic floor muscle strengthening
- Postpartum pelvic floor recovery
- Improved pelvic muscle control
- Bladder-control and continence support
- Intimate wellness programs
- Core stability and posture support
- Menopause-related pelvic wellness
- Age-related pelvic muscle weakness
This machine supports pelvic floor training and wellness services. It is not intended to diagnose or independently treat medical conditions.
Simple, Fully Clothed Sessions
Clients sit comfortably on the pelvic floor chair without removing their clothing. Once the treatment intensity is selected, the machine stimulates rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions throughout the session.
A standard session lasts approximately 30 minutes, with no needles, incisions or anesthesia required. Clients can normally return to their regular activities immediately afterward.
Recommended Treatment Schedule
A commonly used introductory plan includes:
- Two sessions per week
- Approximately 30 minutes per session
- Treatment intensity adjusted progressively
- Continued sessions based on individual goals and professional assessment
The number of sessions and results will vary according to muscle condition, age, health history and consistency.
Designed for Professional Businesses
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is suitable for businesses looking to expand their non-invasive wellness services, including:
- Medical spas
- Aesthetic clinics
- Pelvic wellness centers
- Postpartum recovery centers
- Physiotherapy and rehabilitation practices
- Women’s wellness clinics
- Fitness and body-contouring studios
Its touchscreen controls and adjustable settings make treatment operation straightforward for trained professionals.
Machine Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional pelvic floor chair |
| Technology | HIEMT electromagnetic stimulation |
| Session duration | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Muscle contractions | Up to 12,000 Kegel-equivalent contractions |
| Power supply | 110–240V |
| Adjustable output | 300–5000W |
| Control system | Touchscreen |
| Treatment method | Non-invasive and fully clothed |
| Downtime | None normally required |
| Available colors | Pink, blue |
| Recommended capacity | Approximately 4–6 sessions per day |
| Warranty | Three years |
Specifications and appearance may vary according to configuration. Confirm the required voltage, plug type, color and final technical configuration before ordering.
What Is Included?
Your machine package includes:
- Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair
- English user manual
- Three-hour video training
- Treatment protocols
- Client education materials
- Service-menu and pricing guidance
- Marketing templates
- Remote setup assistance
- Software updates
- Lifetime technical support
- Three-year warranty
Safety and Contraindications
Every client should complete an appropriate health screening before treatment. This machine may not be suitable for people with:
- Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
- Metal implants near the treatment area
- Pregnancy
- Active infection or inflammation
- Recent surgery in the treatment area
- Serious cardiovascular or neurological conditions
- Unexplained pelvic pain or bleeding
Clients experiencing incontinence, pelvic organ prolapse, persistent pelvic pain or other medical symptoms should seek evaluation from a qualified healthcare professional. Treatment should only be provided by trained operators in accordance with the user manual and local regulations.
Order Your Professional Pelvic Floor Chair
Add a comfortable, non-invasive pelvic floor training service to your clinic with the Wikbeauty EMSLIM Kegel Machine.
Contact Wikbeauty today for the current price, available colors, shipping quotation and configuration options.
Receives in 7 days.
$799.00
Professional Photon LED Anti-Aging System 630–660nm Red Light Therapy for Skin Rejuvenation and Collagen Support The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine is a professional LED light therapy system developed for skin rejuvenation, wrinkle care, collagen support, complexion brightening, and general anti-aging treatments. The machine delivers red light at wavelengths between 630nm and 660nm. This non-invasive light therapy supports cellular activity and the skin’s natural renewal processes without needles, incisions, or abrasive treatments. With 15–30-minute sessions, digital or touchscreen controls, dual-voltage compatibility, and professional and home-use options, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, spas, skincare studios, and personal beauty routines. 630–660nm red light | Professional and home use | Non-invasive treatment | CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform 630–660nm Photon LED Therapy
The system emits red light within the 630–660nm wavelength range for controlled skin-rejuvenation treatments. Common applications include: General facial rejuvenation Fine-line and wrinkle care Skin-radiance programs Texture-improvement treatments Neck and décolletage care Hand-rejuvenation programs Collagen and Elastin Support
Red light therapy supports cellular energy activity and the skin’s natural collagen and elastin processes. Common applications include: Reduced skin firmness Early signs of aging Fine-line care Skin-elasticity support Improved-looking texture General age-management programs Complexion and Skin-Quality Care
Photon LED treatments can be incorporated into professional services designed to support a brighter and more even-looking complexion. Common applications include: Dull-looking skin Uneven-looking skin tone Age-spot appearance Pigmentation-appearance care Post-acne skin support General skin-radiance programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the red light function for general facial skin-quality and age-management treatments. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Reduced skin radiance Uneven-looking texture Early signs of aging General facial rejuvenation Recommended for: Clients seeking non-invasive facial care Clients concerned about visible signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality support Firmness and Elasticity Program
Provides a structured treatment course focused on collagen support and improved-looking skin firmness. Recommended applications: Reduced facial firmness Neck and décolletage treatments Skin-elasticity support Fine-line care General collagen-support programs Recommended for: Mature-skin clients Clients concerned about reduced elasticity Clients receiving professional anti-aging treatments Brightening and Tone Program
Uses regular photon treatments to support a brighter and more even-looking complexion. Recommended applications: Dull-looking skin Uneven-looking tone Age-spot appearance Pigmentation-appearance care Skin-radiance programs Recommended for: Clients seeking improved-looking brightness Clients concerned about uneven tone Clients receiving seasonal skincare programs Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatments after completion of the client’s initial photon therapy course. Recommended applications: Skin-radiance maintenance Fine-line care Collagen-support maintenance General anti-aging skincare Continued complexion care Recommended for: Returning photon therapy clients Clients completing a four- to six-week course Home users following the supplied instructions Adjustable Treatment Duration and Frequency
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine allows treatments to be scheduled according to the client’s skin condition, treatment objectives, and professional protocol. Session duration and treatment frequency should be selected according to the supplied instructions, client response, skin sensitivity, and professional assessment. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face
The photon LED system supports non-invasive facial treatments for different age-management and skin-quality objectives. Common treatment objectives include: Fine-line care Wrinkle-appearance reduction Complexion brightening Improved-looking texture General skin rejuvenation Neck and Décolletage
Red light therapy can be incorporated into professional treatments for suitable neck and upper-chest areas. Common treatment objectives include: Neck-line care Improved-looking firmness Décolletage rejuvenation Skin-radiance support Collagen-support programs Hands and Body
Suitable configurations support treatments for the hands and selected body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Hand-rejuvenation treatments Age-spot appearance care Body skin-texture support Post-acne skin care General skin-quality improvement Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s skin condition, treatment objectives, medications, previous procedures, photosensitivity, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Skin Preparation
Clean the selected treatment area and remove makeup, skincare products, jewelry, and reflective accessories. Step 3: Treatment Setup
Position the machine correctly, select the treatment duration and available settings, and provide appropriate eye protection. Step 4: Photon LED Treatment
Activate the red light for approximately 15–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort and skin response throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Switch off the system, inspect the treated area, document the treatment duration and settings, and provide suitable skincare and sun-protection guidance. Designed for Professional and Personal Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine combines professional red light therapy with straightforward digital operation. Key advantages include: 630–660nm photon LED technology Non-invasive red light treatment Facial and body treatment capability Fine-line and wrinkle-care programs Collagen and elastin support Complexion-brightening treatments Approximately 15–30-minute sessions Digital or touchscreen controls Professional salon and spa use Suitable home-use configuration 110V and 220V compatibility CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine Integrated 630–660nm red light treatment system Digital or touchscreen control interface Region-compatible power adapter Power cable Standard machine accessories Eye-protection accessories according to package Warranty card The exact control interface and accessory configuration should follow the selected model and package. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety instructions Treatment-duration guidance Facial-treatment protocols Neck and décolletage protocols Hand and body treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Eye-safety guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved home users operate the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Digital or touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Photosensitivity assessment Treatment-area preparation Correct machine positioning Session-duration selection Facial treatment protocols Neck and décolletage treatments Hand and body protocols Eye-protection requirements Post-treatment skincare Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Eye-protection accessories, power adapters, cables, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, liquid exposure, improper storage, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and skin assessment should be completed before treatment. The device should be operated according to the supplied instructions. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy without appropriate medical guidance Photosensitive medical conditions Photosensitizing medications Active skin cancer or a history requiring medical assessment Active infection or open wounds within the treatment area Severe skin inflammation Recent aggressive skin treatments Medical conditions affected by light exposure Reduced or impaired skin sensation Conditions requiring physician supervision Clients using prescription retinoids, photosensitizing skincare, or photosensitizing medication should receive appropriate professional guidance before treatment. Eye protection should be used according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Clients should not look directly into the active LED light source. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, power adapter, cable, and accessories before use. Complete a consultation and photosensitivity assessment. Clean the treatment area before beginning. Remove makeup, jewelry, and reflective items. Position the machine according to the supplied instructions. Use appropriate eye protection. Follow the recommended treatment duration. Do not exceed the supplied usage frequency. Monitor client comfort and skin response. Do not use over prohibited or unsuitable areas. Clean the equipment after every professional client. Stop treatment if unexpected discomfort or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators and approved users in: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Professional spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Wellness centers Anti-aging treatment facilities Personal home beauty environments Professional operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering LED light therapy. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine? Professional Red Light Wavelengths
The system delivers red light between 630nm and 660nm for non-invasive skin-rejuvenation and collagen-support programs. Multiple Skin-Care Applications
One system supports fine-line care, wrinkle-appearance treatments, complexion brightening, texture improvement, and general skin rejuvenation. Face and Body Versatility
Suitable configurations support treatments for the face, neck, décolletage, hands, and selected body areas. Professional and Home-Use Flexibility
Straightforward digital controls and adjustable treatment duration support professional services and approved personal use. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, treatment protocols, CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine?
It is a red light therapy system developed for skin rejuvenation, fine-line care, complexion brightening, collagen support, and general anti-aging treatments. What wavelengths does the machine use?
The system delivers red light within the 630–660nm wavelength range. How does photon red light therapy work?
Red light is absorbed by light-responsive components within cells and may support cellular energy activity and natural skin-renewal processes. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, décolletage, hands, and suitable body areas. How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 15–30 minutes. How often is treatment recommended?
Recommends three to four sessions per week for an initial four- to six-week course, followed by periodic maintenance. When may users notice changes?
Some users may notice early skin-quality changes within approximately two weeks, with progressive improvement over four to twelve weeks. Individual results vary. Is the treatment painful?
Red light therapy is generally non-invasive and does not create muscle contractions or abrasive sensations. Some users may notice mild warmth. Is there downtime?
Users can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Individual skin response may vary. Is eye protection required?
Appropriate eye protection should be used according to the supplied instructions. Users should never look directly into the active LED light source. Can the machine be used at home?
The supplied information indicates professional and home-use suitability. Home users must follow the operating manual, treatment schedule, safety guidance, and contraindications. Is it suitable for every skin type?
Red light therapy may be used across different skin types, but individual assessment remains important, especially for photosensitive conditions or medications. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, skin condition, treatment consistency, lifestyle, skincare routine, sun exposure, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment positioning, session duration, eye safety, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional Photon Skin Rejuvenation to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, spas, and skincare professionals to provide non-invasive red light therapy for facial and body rejuvenation. Five key benefits: Professional 630–660nm photon LED technology Fine-line, wrinkle, brightness, and collagen-support programs Treatments for the face, neck, hands, and selected body areas Professional and approved home-use flexibility CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, model details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Light Technology
Photon LED red light
Non-invasive skin-rejuvenation treatment
Wavelength Range
630–660nm
Red light therapy
Session Duration
Approximately 15–30 minutes
Customizable treatment time
Initial Course
Three to four sessions weekly
Structured skin-care program
Course Duration
Approximately four to six weeks
Progressive treatment planning
Maintenance
One to two sessions monthly
Continued skin-quality support
Control System
Digital or touchscreen, model-dependent
Treatment management
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Dual-voltage compatibility
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Program
Face
Fine-line care, radiance, and rejuvenation
Facial-rejuvenation program
Neck
Firmness and neck-line care
Firmness and elasticity program
Décolletage
Texture and skin-radiance support
Rejuvenation program
Hands
Age-spot appearance and texture care
Brightening and tone program
Selected Body Areas
General skin-quality support
Professionally selected program
Post-Acne Areas
Texture and skin-recovery support
Suitable skin-quality program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine
Technology
Photon LED red light therapy
Wavelength Range
630–660nm
Primary Functions
Skin rejuvenation, fine-line care, brightening, and collagen support
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, décolletage, hands, and selected body areas
Session Duration
Approximately 15–30 minutes
Recommended Initial Course
Three to four sessions weekly for four to six weeks
Suggested Maintenance
One to two sessions monthly
Display and Controls
Digital or touchscreen, model-dependent
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Use Cases
Professional and home use
Skin-Type Suitability
Suitable for different skin types following assessment
Certificates
CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,829.00
Professional High-Intensity Pulsed Magnetic Therapy System
Dual-Mode Electromagnetic Technology for Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is a professional pulsed electromagnetic therapy system developed for physiotherapy, rehabilitation and appropriately supervised musculoskeletal applications.
With a manufacturer-stated peak magnetic-field strength of 4 Tesla at the applicator coil, two operating modes and a flexible positioning arm, the system supports hands-free treatment workflows in professional clinical environments.
A 10.4-inch touchscreen, integrated water-cooling system and universal voltage compatibility provide convenient operation for qualified physiotherapists and healthcare professionals.
Four-Tesla peak field | Two treatment modes | Hands-free operation | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Magnetic-Therapy Modes ST Mode — High-Frequency Pulsed Operation
ST Mode provides high-frequency pulsed electromagnetic stimulation with an oscillation frequency of up to 130 kHz according to the supplied specification. This mode can be incorporated into professionally supervised programs focused on: Selected musculoskeletal conditions Muscle-stimulation protocols Rehabilitation support Selected joint and soft-tissue applications Other uses authorized for the device MT Mode — 50 Hz Magnetic Operation
MT Mode delivers pulsed magnetic stimulation at 50 Hz. It provides an alternative operating format for protocols involving: Neuromuscular stimulation Muscle relaxation Selected pain-management programs Rehabilitation support Other professionally assessed applications The appropriate mode and parameters must be selected according to the client’s diagnosis, treatment area, contraindications and professional protocol. Understanding the Four-Tesla Specification The supplied technical information lists: Peak magnetic-field strength at the coil: 4 T Magnetic-field strength at 4 cm: 0.4 T Manufacturer-stated maximum reach: up to 18 cm Magnetic-field change rate: 92 T/s The 4 T figure refers to peak output at the applicator coil. Magnetic-field strength decreases with distance from the coil, as reflected by the stated 0.4 T measurement at 4 cm. Treatment effect depends on: Distance from the applicator Applicator positioning Pulse waveform Frequency Exposure duration Tissue anatomy Individual response Non-Contact, Hands-Free Operation The flexible positioning arm holds the treatment applicator over the selected area during operation. This provides several workflow advantages: Consistent applicator placement Reduced need for continuous handpiece movement Convenient positioning around larger joints and muscle groups Minimal preparation compared with contact-based modalities No conductive gel required Treatment through suitable non-metallic clothing Easier integration into professional rehabilitation workflows Hands-free operation does not mean the patient can be left completely unattended. The practitioner should monitor positioning, comfort and system performance throughout treatment. Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications, professional diagnosis and applicable local regulations, pulsed magnetic therapy may be incorporated into rehabilitation programs concerning: Selected knee, hip, shoulder or elbow concerns Muscular tension or spasm Selected osteoarthritis-related symptoms Rehabilitation following suitable sports injuries Selected chronic musculoskeletal pain Range-of-motion programs Neuromuscular stimulation Post-treatment rehabilitation under professional supervision Other applications authorized for the system Clinical evidence varies between conditions, devices and protocols. The PM-ST should not be promoted as treating virtually every pain, spinal, tendon, bone or inflammatory condition. Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Physio Magneto PM-ST should not be advertised as guaranteeing: Cellular re-energization Restoration of cell-membrane potential Increased ATP production Accelerated bone healing Permanent pain relief Elimination of inflammation Reversal of degenerative disease Restoration of damaged spinal tissue Improved circulation in every patient No adverse effects Safety for all age groups or medical conditions These outcomes require evidence for the exact device, parameters, condition and patient population. How Pulsed Magnetic Stimulation Works The applicator coil produces a time-varying magnetic field. A changing magnetic field can induce electrical activity within nearby conductive tissue. Depending on the output, frequency and positioning, this may stimulate peripheral nerves and muscles. The client may experience: Muscle contractions Twitching Tapping or pulsing sensations Tingling Temporary muscle fatigue Post-treatment soreness The technology is non-contact and does not use needles or surgical incisions. However, “non-invasive” does not mean risk-free or suitable for every patient. Build a Professional Rehabilitation Joint-Area Protocols
Position the applicator over an appropriately assessed joint area using the flexible support arm. Large Muscle-Group Stimulation
The high-intensity magnetic field can support professionally controlled stimulation of suitable muscle groups. Neuromuscular Applications
MT Mode provides a lower-frequency option for selected neuromuscular protocols. Rehabilitation Programs
The system may be incorporated into a broader rehabilitation plan that includes exercise, manual therapy and other evidence-based interventions. Monitoring and Reassessment
Treatment progress should be evaluated using appropriate clinical outcome measures rather than relying only on subjective improvement claims. How a Professional Session Works 1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, symptoms, medical history, implanted devices and contraindications. 2. Treatment Planning
The practitioner selects ST Mode or MT Mode according to the clinical objective and device instructions. 3. Applicator Positioning
The patient is positioned comfortably and all metallic objects are removed from the treatment field. The applicator is secured using the adjustable arm. 4. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, treatment time and other available settings are selected according to the professional protocol. 5. Controlled Treatment
Treatment begins while the practitioner monitors patient comfort, muscle response and applicator position. 6. Post-Treatment Assessment
The practitioner checks for discomfort, muscle fatigue, soreness or other responses and documents the session. 7. Follow-Up
Further sessions are scheduled only when appropriate based on the patient’s response and treatment plan. A universal 10–20-minute protocol or fixed 8–12-session course should not be promised for every condition. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Physio Magneto PM-ST control system One magnetic-field treatment applicator One flexible positioning arm Integrated water-cooling system Power cable suitable for the selected market Required connection accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance ST Mode operating guidance MT Mode operating guidance Patient-screening guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Water-cooling maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Touchscreen navigation Applicator positioning ST and MT Mode selection Basic parameter adjustment Patient screening Removal of metallic objects Treatment monitoring Water-cooling maintenance Cleaning and storage Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original treatment applicator Flexible positioning arm Water-cooling components Original connectors Other eligible machine parts Consumable, wear and maintenance components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper water-cooling maintenance Use of unsuitable cooling liquid Damage caused by dropping the applicator Normal wear of moving or support components Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Contraindications and Safety Precautions High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields can interact with implanted devices and metallic objects. The system must not be used without appropriate professional assessment. Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist clearance in patients with: Pacemakers Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators Neurostimulators Medication pumps Cochlear implants Other active electronic implants Ferromagnetic implants or metal in the treatment field Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active cancer in the treatment area Recent bleeding or significant bleeding disorders Uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe cardiovascular conditions Impaired sensation Other contraindications listed in the user manual Additional Operating Precautions
Remove phones, watches, keys, cards and other metallic or electronic objects from the treatment field. Do not position the applicator over the head, eyes or other prohibited areas unless specifically authorized. Confirm implant compatibility before treatment. Monitor the patient for excessive contractions, discomfort, dizziness or other adverse responses. Ensure the applicator is securely positioned before starting. Maintain the water-cooling system according to the supplied instructions. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is suitable for: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine practices Orthopedic rehabilitation clinics Pain-management practices Qualified physical therapists Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose Physio Magneto PM-ST?
High-Intensity Magnetic Output
The system provides a manufacturer-stated peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil. Two Operating Modes
Choose between high-frequency ST Mode and 50 Hz MT Mode according to the professional protocol. Hands-Free Positioning
The flexible arm supports stable applicator placement during supervised treatment. Non-Contact Operation
Treatment can be delivered through suitable non-metallic clothing without conductive gel. Integrated Water Cooling
The 2.5 L cooling system supports controlled equipment temperature during professional operation. Universal Voltage
AC 100–240 V compatibility supports installation across multiple international markets. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training, a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is Physio Magneto PM-ST?
It is a professional high-intensity pulsed magnetic therapy system with two operating modes and a peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil. Is PM-ST the same as conventional low-intensity PEMF?
No. PM-ST uses substantially higher peak magnetic output than many low-intensity consumer PEMF products. Research on one type of electromagnetic device cannot automatically validate another. What is the difference between ST Mode and MT Mode?
ST Mode provides higher-frequency pulsed operation up to the machine’s specified maximum. MT Mode operates at 50 Hz for a different stimulation format. Can patients remain clothed?
The magnetic field can pass through suitable non-metallic clothing. Metallic items, electronic devices and unsuitable garments must be removed from the treatment field. Is treatment painless?
Patients may experience contractions, twitching, tingling or tapping sensations. Intensity should be adjusted according to professional judgment and patient tolerance. Is there any downtime?
Many patients may continue normal activities after treatment, but temporary muscle fatigue, soreness or cramping may occur. Is it safe for patients with pacemakers?
No. High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields may interfere with pacemakers and other active implants. These patients should not be treated unless expressly permitted by the device instructions and relevant medical specialists. How many sessions are required?
There is no universal treatment course for every condition. Frequency and session number must be determined by a qualified professional. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Accidental damage, misuse, improper cooling maintenance and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add High-Intensity Magnetic Therapy to Your Practice
The Physio Magneto PM-ST combines: Up to 4 T peak magnetic output ST and MT operating modes Hands-free applicator positioning A 10.4-inch touchscreen Integrated water cooling Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Specification
Details
Product name
Physio Magneto PM-ST
Product type
Professional pulsed magnetic therapy system
Technology
High-intensity pulsed electromagnetic stimulation
Operating modes
ST Mode and MT Mode
Peak field strength at coil
Up to 4 T
Field strength at 4 cm
Approximately 0.4 T
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach
Up to 18 cm
Maximum oscillation frequency
Up to 130 kHz
MT Mode frequency
50 Hz
Magnetic-field change rate
92 T/s
Therapeutic-intensity reference
Manufacturer-stated ≥10 mT
Display
10.4-inch touchscreen
Applicator support
Flexible hands-free positioning arm
Cooling system
Integrated water cooling
Water-cooling capacity
2.5 L
Input voltage
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Package dimensions
66 × 60 × 49 cm
Net weight
Approximately 40 kg
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Technical support
Lifetime remote support
Receives in 7 days.
Professional Portable 7D HIFU System
Dual-Handle Technology for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is a professional dual-handle system designed for non-surgical facial treatments, skin firming and body-contouring applications.
A dedicated Face Handle and Body Handle provide seven cartridge depths ranging from 1.5 mm to 13 mm. This allows trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for the face, neck or larger body areas.
Its 15-inch touchscreen, universal voltage and portable desktop design make the system suitable for beauty salons, med spas, aesthetic clinics and qualified independent practitioners.
Two dedicated handles | Seven cartridge depths | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
One Portable System for Face and Body Treatments Face Handle
The Face Handle is supplied with four treatment depths for professional facial and neck applications: 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm The available cartridges allow trained operators to develop treatment protocols for different facial areas and tissue depths. Common applications include: Facial skin firming Jawline definition Neck treatments Brow-area lifting Improvement in the appearance of fine lines Facial contour refinement Body Handle
The Body Handle uses deeper cartridges for professional body-contouring and skin-firming applications: 6.0 mm 9.0 mm 13.0 mm These depths are intended for larger treatment areas such as: Abdomen Waist and flanks Upper and lower back Upper arms Thighs Hips Buttocks Cartridge selection and energy parameters must be determined by a trained operator after completing a client consultation. Dedicated 5.5 MHz Eye-Area Cartridge
The 2.0 mm cartridge operates at 5.5 MHz and is designed for precise treatments around appropriate areas near the eyes. It may be incorporated into professional protocols focused on: Appearance of crow’s feet Fine lines around the eye area Localized skin firming Delicate facial areas requiring precise energy placement Treatments near the eyes require advanced knowledge of facial anatomy, correct cartridge positioning and strict adherence to the manufacturer’s safety instructions. The cartridge must never be applied directly over the eye, eyelid or any area prohibited by the operating manual. Seven Treatment Depths for Greater Flexibility The table provides general positioning information only. Treatment depth must be selected according to the client’s anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional protocol. How 7D HIFU Technology Works
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at a selected treatment depth without creating a surgical incision. When applied correctly, controlled energy is directed below the skin’s surface to support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling response. Professional HIFU treatments are commonly incorporated into aesthetic programs focused on skin firming, lifting and contour refinement. The dual-handle design separates facial and body applications, helping operators select the correct handpiece and cartridge for each treatment area. Individual responses and outcomes vary. Results depend on factors such as age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and the protocol used. Professional Treatment Applications
Treatment suitability should be confirmed through a complete consultation and contraindication assessment. Build a Complete Face and Body Service Menu
Facial HIFU Treatments
Use the 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges to develop professional facial treatment protocols at different depths. Precision Eye-Area Treatments
The specialized 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge provides an additional service option for suitable areas around the eyes. Jawline and Neck Contouring
Selectable facial cartridge depths support structured treatments for the lower face, jawline and neck. Body-Contouring Treatments
The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm body cartridges allow operators to work with different body areas and tissue depths. Combination Treatment Plans
Qualified professionals may incorporate face and body services into structured treatment plans. Each area must be assessed and treated according to its individual requirements. Portable Design for Flexible Treatment Spaces
At approximately 17 kg net weight, the system provides the functionality of a dual-handle face and body platform in a portable desktop format. This makes it suitable for: Clinics with limited treatment-room space Beauty salons offering multiple services Practitioners working across different rooms Med spas seeking a compact HIFU system Qualified mobile practitioners with appropriate transport procedures Portable does not mean handheld or suitable for casual transportation. The machine should be moved, packed and installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Professional Operating Controls
The machine provides a large touchscreen interface and adjustable treatment parameters for controlled professional operation. Key operating features include: 15-inch color touchscreen Dedicated Face and Body Handles Continuous and single-shot modes Adjustable energy output Adjustable dot spacing Seven treatment depths Cartridge capacity of 10,000–20,000 shots Universal AC 100–240 V input 200 W rated power All parameters should be selected according to the treatment area, cartridge depth, client condition and recommended professional protocol. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications. 2. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The Face or Body Handle is selected, followed by the cartridge depth appropriate for the treatment area. 3. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed, marked where required and prepared using the recommended coupling medium. 4. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the energy, dot spacing and single-shot or continuous mode according to the approved protocol. 5. Controlled Energy Delivery
The treatment is performed using correct positioning and technique. Client comfort and skin response should be monitored throughout the session. 6. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, tenderness or tingling may occur. Recovery experience varies according to the area treated, energy settings and individual response. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated or vary according to the production configuration. Request the current technical datasheet before ordering. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One portable 7D HIFU touchscreen console One Face Handle One Body Handle Power cable suitable for the selected market Face Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Body Cartridges
One 6.0 mm cartridge One 9.0 mm cartridge One 13.0 mm cartridge Documentation and Support
English user manual Setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final package contents and cartridge shot capacity should be confirmed on the quotation before payment. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Equipment installation Touchscreen navigation Handle and cartridge installation Cartridge-depth selection Basic parameter adjustment Facial and body treatment protocols Eye-area safety considerations Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace any professional qualification, anatomy training or license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects involving: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original Face and Body Handles Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty or replacement conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Misuse or incorrect operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or transportation Normal cartridge depletion Damage caused by dropping a handle Blocked, damaged or incorrectly installed cartridges Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and must only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment. HIFU treatment may not be appropriate for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infections or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery or injectable treatment in the area Other contraindications identified in the operating manual Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The portable 7D HIFU system is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Appropriately equipped mobile aesthetic professionals The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
Dedicated Face and Body Handles
Separate handles help operators select the correct equipment for facial and deeper body applications. Seven Cartridge Depths
A complete 1.5–13 mm cartridge range supports multiple face, neck and body treatment areas. Specialized Eye-Area Option
The 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge provides an additional precision option for appropriately selected areas around the eyes. High Cartridge Capacity
Cartridges are rated for approximately 10,000–20,000 shots, depending on the cartridge and production configuration. Portable Professional Design
The 17 kg desktop format can be repositioned more easily than a large floor-standing system. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the Face Handle and Body Handle?
The Face Handle uses 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for facial and neck applications. The Body Handle uses deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring treatments. What is special about the 2.0 mm cartridge?
The 2.0 mm cartridge operates at 5.5 MHz and is intended for precise treatment of suitable areas around the eyes. It must only be used by a trained operator with appropriate knowledge of facial anatomy. How many shots does each cartridge provide?
The supplied specifications indicate approximately 10,000–20,000 shots per cartridge. Confirm the capacity of each cartridge before ordering. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, energy setting and individual sensitivity. Clients may experience warmth, tingling or temporary discomfort. Treatment should not be described as completely painless. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. When can clients expect results?
Some clients may notice early changes, while tissue-remodeling responses can continue over the following weeks or months. Results and timelines cannot be guaranteed. Is this machine suitable for mobile practitioners?
Its portable design may suit qualified mobile professionals. Safe transportation, stable installation, hygiene control, insurance and compliance with local regulations remain essential. Does the machine work with international power supplies?
The system is specified for AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz. The correct regional plug and electrical configuration should be confirmed before ordering. Is training included?
Remote setup and operating guidance are included. Operators must still meet all professional qualification and licensing requirements applicable in their market. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and RoHS documentation?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Services with Portable Face and Body HIFU
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine combines two dedicated handles and seven treatment depths within one compact professional platform. Use it to develop treatment services for: Facial lifting and firming Precision eye-area treatments Jawline and neck contouring Professional body contouring Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, the complete technical datasheet, cartridge information and purchasing guidance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Cartridge depth
Handle
Intended area
1.5 mm
Face Handle
Superficial facial applications
2.0 mm
Face Handle
Precision and eye-area protocols
3.0 mm
Face Handle
Facial and neck treatments
4.5 mm
Face Handle
Deeper facial and jawline protocols
6.0 mm
Body Handle
Shallow body-treatment areas
9.0 mm
Body Handle
Medium-depth body applications
13.0 mm
Body Handle
Deeper body-contouring protocols
Treatment category
Common areas
Intended aesthetic application
Facial rejuvenation
Forehead, cheeks and lower face
Skin firming and contour refinement
Eye-area treatments
Suitable areas around the eyes
Fine-line appearance and localized firming
Jawline contouring
Lower face and jawline
Definition and tightening
Neck treatments
Neck and submental area
Firming and contour refinement
Body contouring
Abdomen, waist and back
Non-invasive contouring programs
Body firming
Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks
Skin-firming treatments
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional portable 7D HIFU machine
Technology
Focused ultrasound for face and body applications
Treatment handles
One Face Handle and one Body Handle
Total cartridges
Seven
Face cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Eye-area cartridge
2.0 mm depth at 5.5 MHz
Body cartridges
6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Standard frequencies
4 MHz and 7 MHz
Adjustable energy
1.0–3.0 J maximum
Cartridge capacity
Approximately 10,000–20,000 shots
Dot spacing
1–2 mm, adjustable in 0.1 mm increments
Operating modes
Continuous and single-shot
Display
15-inch touchscreen
Rated power
200 W
Input voltage
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Net weight
Approximately 17 kg
Packaged weight
Approximately 20 kg
Package dimensions
58 × 36 × 52 cm
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Declared compliance
CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model
Receives in 7 days.
$1,999.00
Professional Cold Fusional Plasma System
Ten Interchangeable Probes for Customized Skin-Care Treatments
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine is a portable professional skin-care platform developed for dermatology clinics, medical spas, anti-aging centers and advanced beauty studios.
The system combines adjustable cold plasma technology with 10 interchangeable probe heads for surface treatments, localized applications, broader coverage and customized scar-appearance and skin-rejuvenation protocols.
Two multifunctional handles, a digital touchscreen, foot-switch operation and dedicated accessory racks support organized and efficient professional treatments.
Cold plasma technology | Ten interchangeable probes | Two treatment handles | Three-year warranty
Ten Interchangeable Probes on One Professional Platform Plasma Spray
The Plasma Spray Head provides broad, non-contact plasma application across suitable surface skin areas. Common applications include: General skin rejuvenation Dull-looking skin Surface skin conditioning Complexion-care programs Broad facial applications Maintenance-oriented treatments Square Tube Head
The Square Tube Head is designed for controlled treatment of broader skin areas. Common applications include: Cheeks Forehead Neck Décolletage Broad texture concerns General skin-conditioning protocols Flared Tube Head
The Flared Tube Head provides graduated plasma application across selected treatment zones. Common applications include: Medium-sized facial areas Surface skin care Customized intensity programs General rejuvenation Texture-refinement treatments Professional maintenance care Small Roller Needle
The Small Roller Needle supports professionally planned treatments for smaller areas and localized skin concerns. Common applications include: Fine-line appearance Small scar areas Localized texture concerns Precision skin-renewal programs Selected facial zones Customized professional protocols Large Roller Needle
The Large Roller Needle provides wider coverage for professionally selected scar and texture treatments. Common applications include: Larger scar areas Uneven-looking texture Broader skin-renewal programs Body scar appearance Professionally assessed treatment zones Customized advanced protocols 44P Pin Head
The 44P Pin Head provides multi-point contact for broader professional skin-care applications. Common applications include: General skin stimulation Texture-refinement programs Broad facial areas Skin-conditioning treatments Complexion-care programs Customized rejuvenation Ozone Plasma Head
The Ozone Plasma Head supports suitable professional cleansing and skin-conditioning protocols. Common applications include: Acne-prone skin care Oily-skin programs Clarifying treatments Surface skin conditioning Post-cleansing care Customized professional services Diamond-Shaped Head
The Diamond-Shaped Head is designed for controlled treatment of selected texture concerns and contoured areas. Common applications include: Uneven-looking skin texture Surface skin refinement Localized treatment zones Contour-area applications General rejuvenation Professional smoothing protocols Curved Needle Head
The Curved Needle Head supports precision treatment of contoured or difficult-to-reach areas. Common applications include: Curved facial zones Localized scar appearance Precision texture treatments Small treatment areas Contour-focused protocols Detailed professional work Straight Needle Head
The Straight Needle Head is designed for precise localized plasma application. Common applications include: Individual treatment points Small scar areas Localized skin imperfections Precision professional protocols Targeted texture concerns Detailed skin-care applications The appropriate probe, intensity, contact method and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area and professional protocol. Select the Right Probe Combination for Each Client
The system supports customized treatment pathways using one or more of its 10 probes. Program 1: General Skin Rejuvenation
A broad-treatment program for dull-looking skin and general complexion care. Recommended probes: Plasma Spray Square Tube Head Flared Tube Head 44P Pin Head Recommended for: Dull-looking skin General facial rejuvenation Complexion-care programs Professional maintenance treatments Program 2: Fine Lines and Wrinkles
A precision program for suitable facial lines and localized aging concerns. Recommended probes: Plasma Spray Small Roller Needle Curved Needle Head Straight Needle Head Recommended for: Fine-line appearance Forehead areas Suitable eye-contour areas Localized anti-aging programs Program 3: Scar Appearance and Texture
A customized program for appropriately selected scars and uneven-looking texture. Recommended probes: Small Roller Needle Large Roller Needle Diamond-Shaped Head Straight Needle Head Recommended for: Acne-scar appearance Suitable surgical scars Uneven-looking texture Localized skin-renewal programs Program 4: Acne-Prone and Oily Skin
A clarifying program for suitable acne-prone and oily skin. Recommended probes: Plasma Spray Ozone Plasma Head Square Tube Head 44P Pin Head Recommended for: Acne-prone skin Oily-looking skin Clarifying programs Professional skin-conditioning services Precision Probe Selection for Customized Treatments
Ten probes provide different coverage patterns for surface, localized and broader professional treatments. The adjustable settings and interchangeable probes give trained operators greater control over treatment coverage and intensity. New clients should begin with conservative settings before intensity or treatment coverage is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatment of multiple facial and body areas. Facial Treatments
Forehead Cheeks Chin Jawline Suitable areas around the eyes General facial skin Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
Neck Décolletage Hands Suitable upper-chest areas Other professionally assessed zones Scar and Texture Treatments
Acne-scar areas Suitable surgical scars Localized body scars Uneven-looking skin texture Other professionally assessed concerns Professional Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected probe, intensity, treatment area and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, current products, healing response and contraindications. 2. Probe Selection and Preparation
The appropriate probe is selected and installed according to the operating manual. Reusable components are cleaned and disinfected, while single-use components are prepared according to infection-control requirements. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the plasma intensity, operating method and session duration according to the treatment area, probe and client tolerance. 4. Cold Plasma Treatment
The selected probe is applied using the appropriate professional technique. A typical treatment takes approximately 5–10 minutes per area. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and appropriate moisturizer, sunscreen or other aftercare products are recommended. Temporary redness, warmth, dryness, sensitivity or other short-term responses may occur depending on the probe and treatment intensity. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 10 interchangeable probes with two handles and digital controls for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Cold fusional plasma technology Ten interchangeable probes Two multifunctional treatment handles Digital touchscreen control Adjustable treatment intensity Foot-switch operation Two accessory racks Portable and compact design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main cold plasma system, two treatment handles, 10 probes and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Cold Fusional Plasma Machine Two multifunctional plasma handles Plasma Spray Head Square Tube Head Flared Tube Head Small Roller Needle Large Roller Needle 44P Pin Head Ozone Plasma Head Diamond-Shaped Head Curved Needle Head Straight Needle Head Two accessory racks Foot switch Power cable USB power components where applicable English user manual Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Handle and probe installation Probe-selection guidance Intensity-adjustment instructions Professional treatment protocols Safety and contraindication guidance Cleaning and infection-control instructions Routine maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Handle installation Operation of all 10 probes Probe selection Treatment-area planning Intensity adjustment Client consultation Scar and texture protocols Acne-prone skin programs Cleaning and infection control Routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital touchscreen Plasma-generation components Original treatment handles Foot-switch components Handle and accessory connections Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect probe installation or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of probes, needles and consumables Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional plasma equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active cancer Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory skin conditions Recent surgery Recent laser treatments, chemical peels or aggressive exfoliation Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication Bleeding disorders Poor wound healing A history of abnormal or keloid scarring Reduced skin sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Needle and roller probes require appropriate hygiene, disinfection and infection-control procedures. Single-use components must not be reused. Possible treatment responses may include redness, warmth, dryness, temporary irritation, swelling or sensitivity. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Dermatology clinics Medical spas Advanced skin-care studios Anti-aging specialists Aesthetic clinics Trained plasma practitioners Qualified healthcare professionals Professional beauty centers Businesses expanding their advanced skin services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Cold Fusional Plasma Machine? Access Ten Professional Probes
The system includes 10 interchangeable probes for surface, broad-area, localized, scar-appearance and texture-refinement treatments. Customize Every Treatment
Different probe shapes and adjustable intensity settings allow practitioners to create area-specific professional protocols. Treat Multiple Skin Concerns
The system supports professional programs for fine lines, acne-scar appearance, suitable surgical scars, dull-looking skin and uneven texture. Improve Professional Workflow
Two handles, foot-switch operation, a digital touchscreen and two accessory racks support organized and efficient treatments. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is cold fusional plasma?
Cold fusional plasma is an ionized-gas technology used in professional skin-care treatments. The system delivers controlled plasma energy through different treatment probes. What probes are included?
The system includes a Plasma Spray, Square Tube, Flared Tube, Small Roller Needle, Large Roller Needle, 44P Pin Head, Ozone Plasma Head, Diamond-Shaped Head, Curved Needle Head and Straight Needle Head. Which probe is suitable for acne-scar appearance?
Roller or precision probes may be incorporated into professionally planned acne-scar protocols. Probe selection depends on scar type, skin condition and practitioner assessment. How long does a treatment take?
A typical treatment takes approximately 5–10 minutes per area. A session covering multiple areas may require additional time. Can the system be used for fine lines?
Yes. Plasma Spray, Square Tube and Small Roller probes may be incorporated into professional programs for suitable fine-line concerns. Is the treatment painless?
Client sensation varies according to the probe and intensity. Tingling, warmth, prickling or discomfort may occur. Is there downtime?
Recovery depends on the selected probe and treatment intensity. Temporary redness, warmth, dryness, sensitivity or swelling may occur. Can the machine be used on every skin type?
Every client requires professional assessment. Skin type, pigmentation risk, sensitivity, healing history and treatment area must be considered before treatment. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, all 10 probes, intensity selection, treatment protocols, infection control, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Advanced Cold Plasma Treatments to Your Business
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine combines: Professional cold plasma technology Ten interchangeable treatment probes Two multifunctional handles Portable touchscreen and foot-switch operation Three-year parts warranty and professional support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its probe options, package contents and professional training. Order Your Cold Fusional Plasma Machine and Request Pricing
Probe Category
Recommended Application
Spray and Tube Probes
Surface skin care and broader treatment coverage
Roller Probes
Professionally selected scar and texture protocols
Multi-Pin Probe
Broad multi-point skin-conditioning treatments
Ozone Plasma Probe
Clarifying and acne-prone skin-care programs
Precision Needle Probes
Localized and contoured treatment areas
Diamond-Shaped Probe
Texture-refinement and customized applications
Skin Concern
Applicable Probe
Intended Skin-Care Application
Dull-looking skin
Plasma Spray
General rejuvenation
Fine-line appearance
Small Roller or Spray
Anti-aging support
Acne-scar appearance
Roller or Precision Probe
Scar-appearance programs
Suitable surgical scars
Large Roller or Precision Probe
Texture-refinement support
Acne-prone skin
Ozone Plasma Head
Clarifying skin care
Uneven-looking texture
Diamond-Shaped or 44P Head
Surface-refinement programs
Broader facial areas
Square or Flared Tube
General skin conditioning
Contoured areas
Curved Needle Head
Precision professional treatment
Specification
Details
Product Name
Cold Fusional Plasma Machine
Product Type
Portable professional cold plasma system
Technology
Cold fusional plasma
Probe Heads
10 interchangeable probes
Main Handles
Two multifunctional handles
Treatment Duration
Approximately 5–10 minutes per area
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, décolletage, hands and suitable body scars
Primary Applications
Scar appearance, fine lines, texture, acne-prone skin and rejuvenation
Intensity
Adjustable professional settings
Control Interface
Digital touchscreen
Power Supply
USB or AC power configuration
Included Accessories
Two accessory racks and foot switch
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and overload protection
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and technical assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
Elevate Your Practice
Shop by Treatment
Explore professional-grade machines crafted for every aesthetic and wellness need.
Top Sellers You Can't Miss
$999.00
Receives in 7 days.
$1,199.00
Receives in 7 days.
$1,129.00
Receives in 7 days.
$3,999.00
Receives in 7 days.
$1,299.00
Receives in 7 days.
Wait — here's $50 off your order
Looks like you left something behind. Complete your order now and take $50 off with code COMEBACK50 — no minimum purchase required.
- Choosing a selection results in a full page refresh.
- Opens in a new window.